Oki Data Corporation
Tokyo, Japan
PRODUCT SPECIFICATION
FOR
FX-051 FACSIMILE TRANSCEIVER
ISSUE 4
September, 1999
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PRODUCT SPECIFICATION
1.
SCOPE ......................................................................................................................
1-1
2.
GENERAL DESCRIPTION ........................................................................................
General Performance Specifications.........................................................................
General Function Specifications ...............................................................................
User Functions ..........................................................................................................
2-1
2-2
2-7
2-7
2.1
2.2
2.2.1
2.2.2
Service Functions ...................................................................................................... 2-18
3.
PHYSICAL DESCRIPTION .......................................................................................
General Appearance .................................................................................................
Dimensions ................................................................................................................
Weight........................................................................................................................
Product Identification .................................................................................................
Corporate Colors .......................................................................................................
Model Number Plate and Serial Number Label .......................................................
Control Panel .............................................................................................................
Labels and Decals .....................................................................................................
Second Tray (Option) ................................................................................................
Corporate Color .........................................................................................................
Optional Telephone ...................................................................................................
3-1
3-1
3-1
3-1
3-1
3-1
3-1
3-1
3-2
3-2
3-2
3-2
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
3.9.1
3.10
4.
OPERATION .............................................................................................................
Major Apparatus Appearing on the Machine's Cabinet.............................................
Document Guides ......................................................................................................
Tray-Paper.................................................................................................................
Document Stacker .....................................................................................................
Control Panel .............................................................................................................
Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) ..........................................................................
Manual Paper Feeder ................................................................................................
AC Inlet ......................................................................................................................
Power Switch .............................................................................................................
Line Terminal .............................................................................................................
4-1
4-1
4-1
4-1
4-1
4-1
4-1
4-2
4-2
4-2
4-2
4-2
4-2
4-2
4-2
4-2
4-3
4-3
4-3
4-4
4.1
4.1.1
4.1.2
4.1.3
4.1.4
4.1.5
4.1.6
4.1.7
4.1.8
4.1.9
4.1.10 Telephone Terminal...................................................................................................
4.1.11 Optional Memory Board Interface .............................................................................
4.1.12 Second Cassette Interface ........................................................................................
4.1.13 PC Interface Connector .............................................................................................
4.1.14 Optional Telephone Handset.....................................................................................
4.2
Controls and Indicators on Control Panel (Fig. 3-3)..................................................
ATUO REC ................................................................................................................
Transmit Resolution (YES key) .................................................................................
Type of Original (NO key)..........................................................................................
4.2.1
4.2.2
4.2.3
40672201TX Rev.4
i
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.2.4
4.2.5
4.2.6
4.2.7
4.2.8
4.2.9
COPY.........................................................................................................................
Select Function ..........................................................................................................
Auto Dial ....................................................................................................................
Keypad.......................................................................................................................
REDIAL......................................................................................................................
STOP .........................................................................................................................
4-5
4-5
4-6
4-6
4-6
4-7
4-8
4-8
4-9
4-9
4.2.10 START .......................................................................................................................
4.2.11 PLUS, PAUSE and SPACE.......................................................................................
4.2.12 One-Touch Keys........................................................................................................
4.2.13 HYPHEN....................................................................................................................
4.2.14 V.REQUEST/HOOK .................................................................................................. 4-10
4.2.15 SEARCH.................................................................................................................... 4-10
1.2.16 ALARM Indicator ....................................................................................................... 4-10
4.2.17 LCD display ............................................................................................................... 4-11
4.3
Typical Operations..................................................................................................... 4-11
Power Turning On ..................................................................................................... 4-12
Paper Loading ........................................................................................................... 4-12
Typical Transmission................................................................................................. 4-12
Other Transmission Function (Fig. 4-3-1) ................................................................. 4-21
Typical Message Reception (Auto Receive and Manual Receive Modes) ............... 4-22
Multiple Function Combination Table for Communication ........................................ 4-22
User Functions .......................................................................................................... 4-22
Method for Selection Function................................................................................... 4-23
Print from Message in Memory ................................................................................. 4-24
Print from Confidential Reception Message.............................................................. 4-24
Operation of Polling Reception ................................................................................. 4-25
Selection of Reports and Lists................................................................................... 4-25
Selection of Counter Display ..................................................................................... 4-26
User Program Menu .................................................................................................. 4-27
Printer Cleaning......................................................................................................... 4-36
Technical programming (Service Functions)............................................................. 4-37
Local test ................................................................................................................... 4-37
Technical functions.................................................................................................... 4-38
PTT Parameter .......................................................................................................... 4-41
System reset.............................................................................................................. 4-41
Default type set.......................................................................................................... 4-41
PC-Loading ................................................................................................................ 4-41
Reports and Lists....................................................................................................... 4-42
Message confirmation report ..................................................................................... 4-42
Activity report ............................................................................................................. 4-43
Broadcast confirmation report ................................................................................... 4-44
MEMORY Files report ............................................................................................... 4-44
Configuration reports ................................................................................................. 4-45
Service default report (configuration report: service-bit=ON) ................................... 4-45
Telephone directory ................................................................................................... 4-46
Protocol dump data printing ...................................................................................... 4-46
Log Report ................................................................................................................. 4-47
4.3.1
4.3.2
4.3.3
4.3.4
4.3.5
4.3.6
4.4
4.4.1
4.4.2
4.4.3
4.4.4
4.4.5
4.4.6
4.4.7
4.4.8
4.5
4.5.1
4.5.2
4.5.3
4.5.4
4.5.5
4.5.6
4.6
4.61
4.6.2
4.6.3
4.6.4
4.6.5
4.6.6
4.6.7
4.6.8
4.6.9
40672201TX Rev.4
ii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.6.10 Broadcast entry report ............................................................................................... 4-47
4.6.11 Confidential RX report ............................................................................................... 4-48
4.6.12 Power OFF report ...................................................................................................... 4-48
4.6.13 Call back message .................................................................................................... 4-48
4.7
Restrictions by the Printer ......................................................................................... 4-49
Printing time............................................................................................................... 4-49
Printing area and image scaling ................................................................................ 4-50
Operation on alarm occurrence during printing......................................................... 4-50
Heater control ............................................................................................................ 4-51
Warming up of the printer .......................................................................................... 4-51
Other Functions ......................................................................................................... 4-51
Language................................................................................................................... 4-51
Incoming Ringer ........................................................................................................ 4-52
CML-ON timing .......................................................................................................... 4-52
Real time dialing ........................................................................................................ 4-52
Ring duration time ..................................................................................................... 4-52
PC printer mode ........................................................................................................ 4-52
Hyper power save mode (This Wording is tentative) ................................................ 4-53
V34 (33.6/22.8KBPS) MODEM ................................................................................. 4-53
FAX forwarding .......................................................................................................... 4-53
4.7.1
4.7.2
4.7.3
4.7.4
4.7.5
4.8
4.8.1
4.8.2
4.8.3
4.8.4
4.8.5
4.8.6
4.8.7
4.8.8
4.8.9
4.8.10 Cleaning Page mode ................................................................................................. 4-53
4.8.11 Image in MCF ............................................................................................................ 4-54
4.8.12 Distinctive Ring .......................................................................................................... 4-54
4.8.13 Error Criterion Value.................................................................................................. 4-54
4.8.14 DIS BIT 32 ................................................................................................................. 4-54
4.8.15 T1(TX) and T1(RX) Timer Value ............................................................................... 4-55
4.8.16 T2 Timer Value .......................................................................................................... 4-55
4.8.17 TAD I/F ...................................................................................................................... 4-55
4.8.18 Parallel Pick Up ......................................................................................................... 4-55
4.8.19 Oki High speed Protocol for 14.4K ............................................................................ 4-55
4.8.20 Error report ON/OFF.................................................................................................. 4-55
4.9
New Functions and changed operations ................................................................... 4-56
300DPI function ......................................................................................................... 4-56
TX preparation and dual access ............................................................................... 4-57
TR Latch Current ....................................................................................................... 4-57
Point of difference for FX-048 ................................................................................... 4-57
4.9.1
4.9.2
4.9.3
4.10
4.10.1 Deleting BROADCAST/FEEDER selection ............................................................... 4-57
4.10.2 Instant Dialling ........................................................................................................... 4-57
4.10.3 MEMORY FILES REPORT added ............................................................................ 4-57
4.10.4 RESTRICTED ACCESS function added ................................................................... 4-57
4.10.5 PC Loading added ..................................................................................................... 4-57
4.10.6 Personal BOX ............................................................................................................ 4-58
4.10.7 BULLETIN POLLING added...................................................................................... 4-58
4.10.8 Displaying 4-figure Christian era ............................................................................... 4-58
4.10.9 CONTINUOUS TONE ............................................................................................... 4-58
4.10.10 Memory Password ..................................................................................................... 4-58
4.10.11 MFP unlock ................................................................................................................ 4-58
40672201TX Rev.4
iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.11
Reference for wordings between this series and current machines ......................... 4-58
5.
DOCUMENT INPUT ..................................................................................................
Document Width ........................................................................................................
Effective Reading Width ............................................................................................
Transmitter Scanning Method ...................................................................................
Transmit Document Length .......................................................................................
Scanning Resolution .................................................................................................
Automatic Document Feeder Capacity .....................................................................
Contrast Control ........................................................................................................
Input Document Characteristics ................................................................................
Base Weight ..............................................................................................................
Thickness...................................................................................................................
Opacity.......................................................................................................................
Shape ........................................................................................................................
Document Condition ..................................................................................................
Document Damage....................................................................................................
Document Jam Detection ..........................................................................................
Feeder Reliability .......................................................................................................
Document Jam Removal ...........................................................................................
Document Skew ........................................................................................................
Document Stacking ...................................................................................................
Feeder Separation Rubber Useful Life......................................................................
5-1
5-1
5-1
5-1
5-1
5-2
5-2
5-2
5-2
5-2
5-2
5-3
5-3
5-3
5-3
5-3
5-3
5-4
5-4
5-5
5-5
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
5.8
5.8.1
5.8.2
5.8.3
5.8.4
5.8.5
5.9
5.10
5.11
5.12
5.13
5.14
5.15
6.
DOCUMENT OUTPUT ..............................................................................................
Receive Printing Method ...........................................................................................
Effective Recording Width .........................................................................................
Recording Paper........................................................................................................
Recording Paper........................................................................................................
Automatic Recording Paper Feeder Capacity...........................................................
Input Recording Paper Characteristics .....................................................................
Base Weight ..............................................................................................................
Thickness...................................................................................................................
Shape ........................................................................................................................
Recording Paper Condition .......................................................................................
Recording Paper Jam Detection ...............................................................................
Feeder Reliability .......................................................................................................
Recording Paper Jam Removal ................................................................................
Recording Paper Skewing .........................................................................................
Copy Density .............................................................................................................
Copy Uniformity .........................................................................................................
Copy Stacking ...........................................................................................................
Toner Cartridge/Image Drum unit useful life .............................................................
6-1
6-1
6-1
6-3
6-3
6-3
6-3
6-3
6-3
6-4
6-4
6-4
6-4
6-4
6-5
6-5
6-5
6-5
6-6
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.3.1
6.3.2
6.4
6.4.1
6.4.2
6.4.3
6.4.4
6.5
6.6
6.7
6.8
6.9
6.10
6.11
6.12
7.
COMMUNICATION ...................................................................................................
Transmission Line .....................................................................................................
Telephone Line Connection ......................................................................................
7-1
7-1
7-1
7.1
7.2
40672201TX Rev.4
iv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7.2.1
7.3
International NCU ......................................................................................................
Communication Mode................................................................................................
Modem Operation ......................................................................................................
Transmission Mode ...................................................................................................
Signal Level ...............................................................................................................
Protocol and Data Transmission ...............................................................................
Data Compression .....................................................................................................
Minimum Scan Line Time ..........................................................................................
Compatibility ..............................................................................................................
Ring Detect Sensitivity ..............................................................................................
7-1
7-1
7-1
7-2
7-2
7-2
7-3
7-3
7-3
7-3
7.4
7.4.1
7.4.2
7.5
7.6
7.7
7.8
7.9
8.
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS .....................................................................
Power.........................................................................................................................
AC Voltage Range .....................................................................................................
Frequency Range ......................................................................................................
Transients ..................................................................................................................
Power Consumption ..................................................................................................
8-1
8-1
8-1
8-1
8-1
8-1
8-2
8-2
8-3
8-3
8-3
8-3
8-3
8-4
8-5
8-5
8-5
8-5
8-5
8-6
8.1
8.1.1
8.1.2
8.1.3
8.1.4
8.1.4.1 US/CANADA Versions...............................................................................................
8.1.4.2 INT'L Versions ...........................................................................................................
8.1.5
8.2
Rush Current .............................................................................................................
Overheat Protection...................................................................................................
Humidity .....................................................................................................................
Temperature ..............................................................................................................
Shock .........................................................................................................................
Vibration ....................................................................................................................
Static Electricity .........................................................................................................
Acoustic Noise ...........................................................................................................
Radiation ...................................................................................................................
Spurious Noise Level ................................................................................................
Electrical noise ..........................................................................................................
Storage Conditions ....................................................................................................
8.3
8.4
8.5
8.6
8.7
8.8
8.9
8.10
8.11
8.12
9.
SERVICEABILITY .....................................................................................................
Fault Isolation ............................................................................................................
Adjustments ...............................................................................................................
Assembly/Disassembly..............................................................................................
Connector Designation ..............................................................................................
9-1
9-1
9-1
9-1
9-1
9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
10.
OVERALL PERFORMANCE ..................................................................................... 10-1
Mean Time Between Failures (MTBF) ...................................................................... 10-1
Standardization.......................................................................................................... 10-1
Image Transmission Time ......................................................................................... 10-1
Copy Resolution ........................................................................................................ 10-2
Readability ................................................................................................................. 10-2
10.1
10.2
10.3
10.4
10.5
40672201TX Rev.4
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12.
SHIPPING CONDITIONS .......................................................................................... 12-1
Vibration .................................................................................................................... 12-1
Drop Test ................................................................................................................... 12-1
Static Compression ................................................................................................... 12-1
12.1
12.2
12.3
13.
APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS .................................................................................... 13-1
ASTM-D3332-77........................................................................................................ 13-1
FCC Part 15, Class B ................................................................................................ 13-1
NSTA ......................................................................................................................... 13-1
UL 1950 ..................................................................................................................... 13-1
CSA STD C22.2 No. 950........................................................................................... 13-1
IEC Publication 950 ................................................................................................... 13-1
EN60950.................................................................................................................... 13-1
FCC Part 68, Subpart D ............................................................................................ 13-2
IC CS-03 Issue 7 ....................................................................................................... 13-2
Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA)............................................................ 13-2
ITU-T Recommendations .......................................................................................... 13-2
No.2 IIEEJ ................................................................................................................. 13-2
(The Institute of Image Electronics Engineers of Japan)
13.1
13.2
13.3
13.4
13.5
13.6
13.7
13.8
13.9
13.10
13.11
13.12
13.13
13.14
13.15
13.16
VDE 0878 .................................................................................................................. 13-2
BS6305 and relevant regulations .............................................................................. 13-2
EMC Directive 89/336/EEC (CE-mark) ..................................................................... 13-3
Unique International Requirement for Line Connection ............................................ 13-3
13.16.1 DTS (Der Telefax Standard)...................................................................................... 13-3
13.17 Requirement for Option ............................................................................................. 13-3
13.17.1 PC Interface............................................................................................................... 13-3
14.
MACHINE PACKAGING AND CONFIGURATIONS ................................................. 14-1
Shipping Carton Marking ........................................................................................... 14-1
General Configurations ............................................................................................. 14-1
Machine Models ........................................................................................................ 14-2
Package Contents ..................................................................................................... 14-2
14.1
14.2
14.3
14.4
APPENDIX A MFP Function
APPENDIX B FAX2NET Product Specification
40672201TX Rev.4
vi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.
SCOPE
This package describes the FX-051 Facsimile Transceiver, which may be referred to as “the
product” or “the machine” in this section.
The product will be manufactured by Oki Data Corporation and distributed by ODA/OEL
under an appropriate product name given by ODA/OEL upon agreement with Oki Data
Corporation.
40672201TX Rev.4
1 - 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The FX-051 is a half duplex, high performance, Facsimile Transceiver machine which
communicates with distant stations over a voice level telephone line.
The product can have a MFP (Multi-Function Peripheral) function as option (standard for ODA
version) and use as "PC-scanner", "PC-printer" and "PC-fax" by connecting with PC.
The product can have a FAX2NET service function (FAX over IP, FAX to E-mail, Virtual
E-mail and Web retrieval) and a user facsimile can use internet functions by communicating
with the neighboring FAX2NET server.
Note: User needs to contract with FAX2NET.
The product will be made available in “6” versions which, in general, vary with the product
specifications requested by the market area.
ODA (US and CANADA) versions will be designed to meet the ITU-T G3 recommendations
and operate on 120V AC.
The International versions will be designed to meet the ITU-T G3 recommendations and
operate on 230V AC.
The international versions will be named as follows:
1.
OEL
Denmark
Holland
Finland
Norway
Sweden
Ireland
Spain
Portugal
Belgium
Greece
Italy
2.
3.
GER
Germany
Austria
Switzerland
France
UKF
United Kingdom
ODA (Latin America)
OKI-INT
4.
5.
Out of Europe (Australia, New Zealand, Singapore and Malaysia etc.)
Note: Each version described above is shown as below in this document.
US:
ODA-US and CANADA version
INT'L:
ODA:
OEL, GER, UKF, ODA-Latin America, OKI-INT version
ODA-US and CANADA version and ODA-Latin America version
40672201TX Rev.4
2 - 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.1 General Performance Specifications
General performance specifications of the product are described below for a more thorough
understanding of the following descriptions:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
Style design
Desktop design
Applicable network type
PSTN (Public Switched Telephone Network), PBX telephone line.
Compatibility
The product can communicate with a machine operating in ITU-T G3 mode.
Document size
NA Legal/NA Letter/ISO A4 to ISO A5
Effective reading width
NA Letter: 215 mm maximum (US)
ISO A4:
208 mm maximum (INT'L)
Note: Refer to 5.2 in detail
Scanning length
6)
7)
8)
128 mm to 356 mm
Length setting = infinite is also available.
Printing paper size
1st Tray
Universal type (Legal/Letter/A4 changeable): 100 sheets max.
Printable width
NA Letter:
NA Legal:
ISO A4:
203.2 mm (203.2 mm for assured quality)
203.2 mm (203.2 mm for assured quality)
203.2 mm (197.3 mm for assured quality)
40672201TX Rev.4
2 - 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9)
Printable length
NA Letter:
NA Legal:
ISO A4:
273.4 mm (266.7 mm for assured quality)
349.6 mm (342.9 mm for assured quality)
291.0 mm (284.3 mm for assured quality)
10) Copy Stacker
Copy stacker will have a capacity of 30* copies maximum.
(Faceup stacking)
* Note: Using the recommended paper
11) Printing paper
Plain paper
12) Resolution
(1) Horizontal resolution
a) Scanning
300 dots per inch in horizontal line.
•
b) Printing
300 dots per inch in horizontal line.
•
(2) Vertical resolution
a) Scanning
•
300 dots per inch, 15.4, 7.7, and 3.85 lines per mm in vertical direction, switch-
selectable.
b) Printing
[Received FAX message]
•
784 to 1076 dots per inch using image smoothing process and 300 to 412 dots
per inch in the vertical direction automatically.
[Local copy]
•
Refer to 2.2.1(37) Local copy
[PC printer]
•
300 dots per inch and 1200 dots per inch (Quasi 600 dpi)
Note 1: Variable resolution printing rates for vertical direction are available, so
variable reduction printing rates are provided.
Note 2: The machine prints received FAX message at 300 x 784 to 1076 DPI using
image smoothing process even if transmitted resolution is 8 dots/mm x 3.85,
7.7 or 15.4 lines/mm.
40672201TX Rev.4
2 - 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13) Scanning method
• 2592 bits contact image sensor.
14) Printing method
211.3 mm (2496 bits) and/or 216.7 mm (2560 bits)
15) Minimum scanning time
NSS= 0, 5, 10 ms
DCS= 0, 5, 10 ms
16) Minimum print time
NSF= 0 ms
DIS=10 milliseconds for 3.85 lines/mm.
5 milliseconds for 7.7 lines/mm.
17) Print speed
Max. 8 sheets per minute (at NA Letter size)
Note : Under following conditions, the printing speed will be at 6 PPM.
- In PC print mode
- When the paper width is smaller than JISB5(128mm).
18) Power save
The FX-051 realizes low power consumption by new power supply unit.
This function is feeding power to the necessary minimum circuit at standby state by
adoption of New power supply. When the machine becomes the operation state, power
supply is feeding to the all circuits.
By adoption of this system, power consumption at standby state becomes below 0.5W.
Pre-heating time (Standby to Print):
Approx.30 sec
Note 1: When the “MCF automatic printing” is set to ON, the MCF printout time is as
follows. (Communication end to Print)
Approx. 20 sec
Note 2: This feature is not available FX-051 (ODA)
19) Coding scheme
Modified Modified READ (MMR), Modified READ (MR), and Modified Huffman (MH).
40672201TX Rev.4
2 - 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
20) Modem
ITU-T V.29/V.27 ter./V.21 and V.17, V.33, as applicable.
21) Transmission speed
6 seconds (approx 6.9 sec) at 14.4 Kbps per sheet of ITU-T No.1 evaluation test chart,
typical.
Note 1: This speed denotes the time interval corresponding to Phase C
(message transmission phase) as referred to in ITU-T T.30.
22) Protocol
ITU-T T.30 and Oki special protocol (speed protocol) will be available.
23) Error correction scheme
ITU-T ECM defined in T.4, T.30 are provided.
This should be applicable to MH, MR and MMR coding schemes.
24) Speed protocol
High-speed Protocol - the T.30 handshake procedure will be conducted at message
transmission speed instead of 300 bps during multi-page and multi-document
transmissions.
Note : This feature disable when you set 9.6k to the H/Modem Rate (technical setting
No.13) .
25) Memory capacity
1.0 M-byte
26) Major control and display apparatus
Ten-key pad for dialing and programming.
LCD display of 20 characters in 2 rows for operation guidance, clock display, and
display of various kinds of information.
27) Power supply unit
120 VAC +6% or -15% (i.e., 102 V to 127 V), 50/60 Hz ±2% for US and CANADA
versions.
230 VAC +15% or -14% (i.e., 198 V to 264 V), 50/60 Hz ±2% for INT’L.
40672201TX Rev.4
2 - 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
28) MFP function
By installing the optional software to PC, the following MFP function can be realized:
• PC Printer function
• PC Scanner function
• PC FaxModem function
• Location Programing function
For details, see appendix A "MFP product specification"
Note 1: This function is the standard for ODA.
29) FAX2NET function
The following FAX2NET function can be realized:
• FAX over IP function
• FAX to E-mail function
• Virtual E-mail function
• Web retrieval function
• Payment Card Registration (Note2)
For details, see appendix B "FAX2NET Product Specification"
Note2: May not used according to dealer's conditions.
40672201TX Rev.4
2 - 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.2 General Function Specifications
General function specifications for the product are given below. They are summaries of
whole descriptions. For convenience of description, the functions are classified in two
categories:
User functions and Service functions.
2.2.1 User functions
1)
Transmissions
Transmission is available by auto dial (10 one-touch numbers, 70 two-digit numbers,
as well as standard keypad dialing).
2)
3)
Reception
Reception is available by auto reception and manual reception.
Dual access
The machine can scan another document into document memory during memory TX/
RX and paper reception.
4)
Voice request
A voice request from the transmitter is available only upon completion of the total
message transmission.
A voice request from the receiver is available at the end of each page being received.
A voice request function is available in normal transmission and normal reception.
(refer to Table 4-x)
5)
Auto redial
If a call cannot be connected to the distant station because the line is busy or no
answer is returned, this feature redials the same station after a predetermined interval.
The redial interval and the number of redial tries are set by the user in the US/
CANADA version and in some INT’L versions where allowed by the PTT, and by a
service engineer in other INT’L versions.
If a communication terminates with an error in memory TX mode (no response to
POST-COMMANDS) the machine re-dials and re-transmits from the first page to the
same station.
40672201TX Rev.4
2 - 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6)
Manual redial
This feature is available to repeat dialing of the last called dial number.
There is no limit on the number of repeat attempts.
However, there are several restrictions in manual redial and feeder TX operation after
restoration of power.
After restoration of power, the machine can not return to the previous operation
condition before the power failure.
Restoration of power means that the voltage returns to the normal value after power
failure.
For example, the waiting condition of delayed preparation transmission (delayed
feeder TX) changes into abandoned documents after power failure. Abandoned
document means that the document was set on the feeder, and the phone number for
the feeder TX or TX preparation is not set.
Moreover, the waiting of redial condition of feeder TX or feeder TX preparation turns
into abandoned document conditions.
Since the registered data for redial is lost by power failure, the manual redial is not
available by the past data after power failure.
7)
A.D.F.
The feeder feeds 15 sheets maximum (Letter/A4-size 13-28 1b).
When using recommended paper. 20 sheets maximum can be fed.
Note: Recommended paper: 20 1b bond paper (NA Letter and ISO A4-size)
Multi-Copy
8)
9)
The machine reproduces max. 50 copies of document with 3.85 lines/mm or 7.7 lines/
mm resolution locally.
Sender ID
Time & date, plus 32 characters maximum. The sender ID is marked to the top
(outside only) of every reproduced copy in the remote receiver.
10) Personal ID
The upper 16 digits of the Sender ID are sent to the remote station separately to
indicate the “personal ID”.
The personal ID is displayed at the LCD display and is also printed out in the activity
report in case of memory reception. This function is available only for communication
using NSF signal.
40672201TX Rev.4
2 - 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11) TSI/CSI
20 characters maximum are displayed. If the function is enabled, the received TSI is
marked at the top of first reproduced copy.
12) Polling (TX & RX)
Documents set on the A.D.F. or in the memory can be polled from a remote station.
The machine can also receive documents from a remote station (RX).
Note: Password is not used for the Polling (TX & RX)
13) Acoustic monitor
The monitor is available about 5 seconds after dialing for TX mode only. Loudness is
selectable to zero.
14) Activity report
Activity report can manually printed out the latest 30 communications (all transmisson,
memory reception and error reception) . Normal reception is not reported in the
activity report.
Note : This function is not available for GER version.
15) Protocol dump
The protocol dump is printed out by manual operation .
16) Optional telephone
Optional telephone is not available.
17) Automatic alternate selecting call
Two facsimile numbers can be registered to each One-touch key (No. 1 to No. 10) for
sending a facsimile message to either of two distant numbers. When the first remote
station is busy, the machine automatically dials the other distant number.
18) Delayed TX
This function enters a message transmission time(s) and location(s) for execution at a
specified time. 5 specified times can be registered (within 3 days).
40672201TX Rev.4
2 - 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
19) Relay broadcast initiate
This function automatically originates a message call via a relay station (which should
be equipped with a Model OF27, OF38, OKIFAX-2600 or equivalent) to up to 99
locations.
20) Group dial list
This function can store 5 lists.
21) Confidential message transmission
This function transmits a Confidential-marked message to any one of 64 predesignated
mailboxes provided in a distant machine.
22) Confidential message reception (Memory)
The receiving message is not printed out on the recording paper, but is stored in 8
mailboxes (memory) specified by the sending side.
The receiving message can be extracted from the mailbox by using the password
registered in advance.
23) Half-tone transmission
This function transmits/reproduces the half-tone area of a document image in a 64-
scale gradation, using the Error Diffusion Image Processing algorithm.
24) Sequential broadcast
The same message can be sent to 90 at maximum, then 10 random dials are usable.
Delayed broadcast is available.
25) No paper/no toner receive
When the recording paper runs out, this feature allows continued reception of
documents and memorizes the received data in the built-in 1M-byte memory.
Note:
FX-051 does not back up the message received in memory for the power
failure.
26) Memory only reception
All received messages are stored in message memory and printed out at the
operator’s request.
40672201TX Rev.4
2 - 10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
27) Page re-transmission
This feature is a part of the memory transmission feature that re-transmits in page
units image information that is distorted to a certain extent during transmission. This
feature is effective only for Memory Transmission mode.
28) Distinguishing text from pictures
In half-tone scanning, half-tone image portions such as photographs, can be
automatically discriminated from binary text portions by appropriate image processing.
29) Reduction printing
In the case of reception mode, in order to print the received document in one cut sheet
as far as possible, the vertical reduction rate at the time of printing is about 100% to
75%.
For details, refer to 4.7.2.1 “Variable (reduction) printing”.
30) Smoothing print
The machine can provide the higher resolution print with image smoothing process.
Copy and received Fax messages are interpolated and printed out quasi 300 dpi with
print image smoothing technology.
When the received or copy document is 8 dots/mm x 3.85, 7.7 or 15.4 lines/mm, the
printed document will be 300 dots/inch x 784 lines/inch.
31) Dialing
The following four types of dialing are available.
• One-touch dial:
• Speed dial:
• Group dial:
10 one-touch keys
Max. 32 digits
70 two-digit auto dial codes
Max. 32 digits
5 dialing groups
Max. 80
• Keypad dial:
Full digit keypad dialing
40672201TX Rev.4
2 - 11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
32) Chain dialing
This means consecutive dialing by using 2 or more One touch keys.
33) Realtime dialing
The dialing digit signal can be transmitted immediately to the line when pressing the
keypad, when dialing with telephone off-hook or Hook key is pressed.
34) Automatic pause signal insertion
A pause signal can be inserted automatically only in Re-dial operation after real time
dialing has been executed.
35) Mixed dialing
The DTMF tone signal is output when the * key is pressed after DP dialing.
36) TX Preparation (Hopper)
This feature enables the machine to prepare for scanning and transmitting the
document set on the ADF during reception or communication of the other documents
stored in memory. After completion of the communication, the document set on the
ADF will be scanned and transmitted.
37) Local copy
A document sheet on the A.D.F. can be copied locally with following resolution on the
print sheet.
Scanning: 200* dots/inch x 3.85 lines/mm or 300 dots/inch x 7.7 lines/mm or
15.4 lines/mm
* : Convert from 300 to 200
Printing: 300 dots/inch x 784 lines/inch
Note : The image smoothing process printing is used STD scanning resolution (200
dots/inch x 3.85 lines/mm).
38) Alpha/Location (Telephone directory)
In addition to the telephone numbers, each of the one-touch keys and the Speed-dial
locations may have an alpha/numeric name registered to it.
The maximum number of characters is 15.
40672201TX Rev.4
2 - 12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
39) TEL/FAX automatic switching
(1)
(2)
If the machine detects a call with a CNG signal indicating an auto send facsimile
call, it starts an automatic document receiving operation.
If it detects a call without a CNG signal, it sounds the buzzer to indicate a
telephone call. The calling person can hear a “ring back” tone within a
predetermined time.
If the operator at the called side does not lift the handset within the predetermined
time, the machine automatically starts a document receiving operation.
Voice conversation will be available automatically through the handset by lifting up the
handset or press the STOP key while the call buzzer is sounding.
Note 1: The predetermined time is selectable between 20 or 35 sec.
40) Session number
The session number is assigned automatically to the document transmitted and is
transmitted together with Sender ID on the top of each page.
41) Time and Date print
Time and Date information of the receiver side can be printed on every page of the
document received (except memory reception).
42) Closed user group (Direct mail rejection )
This feature limits communication by TSI/CSI.
The received TSI/CSI from the remote location is compared with the bottom 4-digits in
One-touch and Speed-dial numbers registered in the machine. When it matches the 4
digits, message receiving is accepted.
43) TX contrast and resolution control
The document transmitted can be controlled with 3-levels of contrast (dark, normal,
light) and 3-levels of resolution (standard, fine, extra fine) by the control panel.
40672201TX Rev.4
2 - 13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
44) Key touch tone
The key touch tone sounds when any key on the control panel is pressed.
45) Machine counter (Under planning)
The machine has five counters to count DRUM, TONER, DRUMT and PRINT for
printer section and SCAN for scanner section.
Caution of “CHANGE DRUM” is displayed on LCD when the DRUM has reached the
life time.
User can reset the DRUM counter when the user change the DRUM.
However, user cannot reset the DRUMT counter regarding total number of DRUM
counter for the machine, to save the history.
Display
Clear Operation
Counter
User
Service
User
Service
DRUM COUNTER
TONER COUNTER
DRUMT COUNTER
PRINT COUNTER
SCAN COUNTER
x
x
K
K
K
K
K
K
x*1
x
K
K
K
K
K
x
K
K
x
x
K is available.
x is not available.
*1: ODA version is available
46) Message confirmation report (single address or multi-addresses)
(i)
The destination address (CSI, etc.), the result of the last transmission attempt
and the total number of pages, etc., are automatically printed. In case of Memory
Tx, a part of the picture is added to MCF report at automatic print-out mode.
ON/OFF setting of automatic printing is available and manual control for printing
is also available.
(ii)
A message confirmation report for multi-addresses communication such as
broadcast can be also printed automatically with ON/OFF setting.
Message confirmation is individually printed for each address.
40672201TX Rev.4
2 - 14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
47) Broadcast entry report (confirmation purpose)
For broadcast, each destination address and entry time etc. (immediate or delayed), is
available for printing by manual control, only during programming prior to the
communication.
48) Transmission error report
The destination address, error status and total number of pages etc, are printed out
when a communication error takes place.
49) Confidential RX report
This report is printed out when the confidential RX message is received.
50) Speed scanning
This function is automatically activated to reduce the operation time during scanning.
51) TAD mode (For external telephone answering device)
This function switches an automatic voice message response to the calling station.
When TAD does not answer the RI signal from the line, or the machine cannot detect
the OFF-HOOK state, though the machine is set to the state of TAD mode, the
machine can automatic answer according to the value of T/F Timer PRG. (User's
setting No. 10).
(Refer to Fig. 4-4-12)
The machine has 4 types (OFF/TYPE1/TYPE2/TYPE3) of settings in SERVICEMAN
SETTING with regard to TAD mode.
OFF setting means that the machine does not have TAD MODE function.
TYPE1 means ...
1. RING comes.
2. The TAD makes answering, returns the recorded voice
message in TAD for calling party.
3. The FAX machine will examine to detect CNG signal while
TAD works.
4. If the FAX machine detects CNG signal or Remote Receive
No., the machine will go into normal receiving mode.
5. Even though the FAX machine does not detect CNG signal ,
the FAX machine will go to receiving mode in hook-on
condition.
TYPE1 is the same as OKIFAX1000 series.
40672201TX Rev.4
2 - 15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TYPE2 means ...
TYPE3 means ...
The functions from #1 to #4 of upper TYPE2 are the same as
TYPE1.
If the FAX machine does not detect CNG signal during working
of TAD, the machine will go to standby mode.
The functions from #1 to #2 of upper TYPE3 are the same as
TYPE1.
3. The fax machine does not detect CNG signal during 15
seconds from start of TAD operation.
4. The fax machine starts CNG signal detection after 15
seconds from start of TAD operation and shifts to receiving
mode after detecting CNG signal.
5. If the fax machine does not detect CNG signal during
working of TAD, the machine will go to standby mode.
52) FAX forwarding
This function is not available.
53) ANIS
This function is the operation in order to utilize specific service “ANIS”. This function is
available only for German area.
(In case of setting Country code to GER, AUT or SUI)
Machine's performance is as follows:
When operator enters hypen key, machine controls “FLASH process” for 250 msec.
54) Other functions
• Date and Clock adjustment
• Print out of machine configuration
• Telephone number lists registered as Local Code
• Telephone number list of One-touch keys
• TSI print
• Generate CNG signal
• Generate CED signal
• Echo protection for international TX/RX
• Parallel pick up (Switching by the external TEL)
• Distinctive ring detect
• Unique parameter (set to One-touch keys. e.g. Echo protection)
• Programmable parameter list (user dial-parameter setting)
• Power outage report
• Confidential reception
• Polling TX (Memory)
• Bulletin poll TX
• Restricted access
• Active memory files
• EXTRA FINE (15.4 lines/mm) reception capability
40672201TX Rev.4
2 - 16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
55) The following functions are not available.
• 2nd cassette
• Confidential broadcast
• Relay broadcast
• Delayed confidential transmission
• Delayed relay broadcast initiate
• Split transmission
• Delayed mail box transmission
• Secure poll TX
• Battery backup (picture data)
• FAX forwarding
• No reduction TX
• Reduction TX
• Secure polling RX
• Continuos polling RX
• Multiple address polling RX
• Delayed multiple address polling RX
• Internal Encryption
• DTMF operation
• Generate bell signal for external telephone
• Voice answering
• Repeat printing
• Department ID
• TEL charge account
• Auto cover sheet
• Total page set
• Memory entry report (Single address)
• Memory entry report (Multi-polling RX)
• Relay broadcast report
• RX error message print (When reception is discontinued)
• Programmed parameter list
• Verification stamp
40672201TX Rev.4
2 - 17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.2.2 Service functions
1)
Local diagnosis (Refer to Fig. 4-1-1/2)
Local diagnosis consists of a LED test, MF tone test, sensor test, H-MODEM TX/RX
test, tone test and print test, including memorized test pattern printing, a memory check
and a program version check.
2)
3)
RMCS
(i)
The remote diagnosis consists of at least by current RMCS model 20 (Remote
Management Center System)
Other functions
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
MDY/DMY switchable
Long document Scanning
Attenuator
NL equalizer
No paper/No toner RX
Sensor CAL.
Service bit
TIME/DATE print
Service default list
Machine configuration list
Echo Protection (Ignore 1st DIS/CED-DIS timer/Tone for echo)
Echo Protection setting includes the Ignore 1st DIS, CED-DIS timer to unity from
three to one setting.
Detailed setting is shown below.
New setting
Echo Protection
OFF
ON
Ignore 1st DIS
CED-DIS timer
Tone for echo
OFF
75 ms
OFF
ON
1.5 s
ON
Current setting
40672201TX Rev.4
2 - 18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.
PHYSICAL DESCRIPTION
3.1
General Appearance
Overall design and mechanical structure of the product are shown in Fig. 3-1, 3-2.
3.2
Dimensions
Overall dimensions of the product are less than the following:
Width: Approx. 316 mm
Depth: Approx. 383 mm
Height: Approx. 190 mm
3.3
3.4
Weight
The nominal weight of the product, excluding recording paper and packing materials, will not
exceed approx. 8 kg.
Product Identification
The ODA/OEL/OEM companies corporate logo and product name will appear on the control
panel sheet.
3.5
3.6
Corporate Colors
The color and finish of the cabinet, and various attachments are shown in Table 3-1.
Model Number Plate and Serial Number Label
Model numuber plate and serial number label will be attached to the machine. This model
number plate will give agency approvals (UL, CSA, safety requirements), model number, AC
power requirements, and will identify the ODA/OEL company as the vendor.
3.7
Control Panel
The Control Panel is shown as Fig. 3-3.
40672201TX Rev.4
3 - 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.8
Labels and Decals
Some of the following Labels and Decals shall be pasted on the machine if necessary.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
FCC Label Part 15 and Part 68
Warning label on Power code
DOC certification
DOC LOAD NUMBER
BABT Approval Label
BABT REN Label
Warning Label for Fuser
3.9
Second Tray
Second Tray is not available.
3.9.1 Corporate color
The color and finish of the cabinet is shown in Table 3-1 and 3-2.
3.10 Optional Telephone
Optional Telephone is not available.
40672201TX Rev.4
3 - 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 3-1 OKI FX-051 Corporate Colors
Parts Description
Enclosures
Color Name
Color Reference
Cover-Top
Tray-Paper
Silver Gray
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
OKI DATA Original 3.5Y8/0.5
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Cover - Front
Cover - Main
Cover - NCU
Cover - Rear
Tray - Document
Ditto
Ditto
Other Parts
Stacker Document
Telephone Set (Option)
Silver Gray
Silver Gray
OKI DATA Original 3.5Y8/0.5
OKI DATA Original 3.5Y8/0.5
Control Panel
Case-OPE(T)
Start Button
Silver Gray
Blue
OKI DATA Original 3.5Y8/0.5
JSR-6D7960
Stop Button
Pink
JSR-4D5780
Ten Key
Silver Gray
Ditto
Ditto
Cool Gray
Cool Gray
Cool Gray
Amber
OKI DATA Original 3.5Y8/0.5
Ditto
Ditto
PANTONE Cool Gray 7C
PANTONE Cool Gray 7C
PANTONE Cool Gray 5C
None
Function Button
One Touch Key
Function Sheet
One Touch Sheet
Ten Key Sheet
Status Indicator (LED)
Alarm Indicator (LED)
Red
None
Lettering and Symbol
Start Button
White
N9.5
Stop Button
White
N9.5
Ten Key
Cool Gray
Cool Gray
Cool Gray
White
PANTONE Cool Gray 10C
PANTONE Cool Gray 11C
PANTONE Cool Gray 7C
N9
Function Sheet
One Touch Sheet
Ten Key Sheet
LOGO (Model name: OKIFAX4500)
("OKIDATA" & "84")
("OKI")
Cool Gray
Red
Red
PANTONE Cool Gray 11C
PMS 032
PANTONE 032C
PMS 425
(Model name: OKIOFFICE)
Gray
Note: Pending for ODA version.
40672201TX Rev.4
3 - 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operator Panel Design (Alphabetalic Characters on Ten-key Pad)
The specification is accordance with ITU (formely CCITT) recommendation, E.161.
Some other countries will also introduce this specification for the approvals in near future.
ABC
2
DEF
3
1
GHI
4
JKL
5
MNO
6
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
*
0
#
TONE
OPER/UNIQUE
40672201TX Rev.4
3 - 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
383 mm
316 mm
Tray-Paper
Tray-Document
Cover-Top
Case-OPE (T)
Cover-Front
Cover-Main
Cover Manual Document
Stacker-Document (Optional)
Fig. 3-1 FX-051 External View
40672201TX Rev.4
3 - 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C N 1 0 N C U
C N 1 1 C e n t r o
L E D - H e a d
C N 1 2
S p e a k e r
C N 9
C N 4 O P E
C N 3 P C 1 / 2
C N 5 C I S
Fig. 3-2-1 Internal Configuration for FX-051
40672201TX Rev.4
3 - 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Separation rubber
Paper
Scanner block
Roller - ADF
Document
LED head
EP drum
Roller - Heater
OPE board
Paper exit
ID unit
Roller - Scan
Document exit
Image sensor
Roller - Hopping
Manual paper feeder inlet
Printer block
Fig. 3-2-2 Internal Configuration for FX-051
40672201TX Rev.4
3 - 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fig. 3-3 FX-051 Control Panel
Rev. 2
40672201TX Rev.4
3 - 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX
Fig. 4-1 (1/2-2/2)
Fig. 4-1-1 (1/2-2/2)
Fig. 4-1-2
General Key Operation (No Document)
Typical Transmission
Typical Reception
Fig. 4-2-1
Power on Operation
Fig. 4-2-2 (1/2-2/2)
FX-051 Mechanical Control Sequence
Operation with Programming
Fig. 4-3-1
One Touch Key Operation
Fig. 4-3-2
Technical Programming
Local Test
Fig. 4-3-3 (1/3-3/3)
Fig. 4-3-4 (1/3-3/3)
Fig. 4-3-5
Technical Function Programming
System Reset
Fig. 4-3-6
Default Type Setting
Fig. 4-3-7
Delayed TX
Fig. 4-3-8 (1/2-2/2)
Fig. 4-3-9
Personal Box Print Out
Confidential TX Programming
Relay Broadcast Initiate
Polling TX/RX Programming
Report Print
Fig. 4-3-10 (1/2-2/2)
Fig. 4-3-11
Fig. 4-3-12 (1/2-2/2)
Fig. 4-3-13 (1/2-2/2)
Fig. 4-3-14
Counter Display/Clear
One-Touch Programming
Auto-Dial Programming
Group Dial Programming
User Function Programming
Function Programming
Dial Parameters
Fig. 4-3-15
Fig. 4-3-16
Fig. 4-3-17
Fig. 4-3-18 (1/4-4/4)
Fig. 4-3-19 (1/4-4/4)
Fig. 4-3-20
Clock Adjustment
Fig. 4-3-21
System Data Programming
Personal Box Programming
Memory Password Programming
Restrict ID Programming
Printer Cleaning Operation
Fig. 4-3-22
Fig. 4-3-23
Fig. 4-3-24
Fig. 4-3-25
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - i
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operations During Communication or Standby
Fig. 4-4-1
Copy Operation
Fig. 4-4-2
Message Confirmation Report
AUTO REC Key Operation
Transmit Resolution and Type of Original
LCD Message During Communication
Calling Operation
Fig. 4-4-3 (1/3-3/3)
Fig. 4-4-4
Fig. 4-4-5 (1/3-3/3)
Fig. 4-4-6 (1/5-5/5)
Fig. 4-4-7
Memory Cancel
Fig. 4-4-8
Stop Operation
Fig. 4-4-9
Voice Request
Fig. 4-4-10
Alarm State and Received into Memory
TEL/FAX AUTO SW Reception
TAD Interface
Fig. 4-4-11
Fig. 4-4-12
Fig. 4-4-13
Print Out from Memory Reception by Replace Paper
Print Out from Memory (Memory Only Reception)
Power Off Report
Fig. 4-4-14 (1/2-2/2)
Fig. 4-4-15
Fig. 4-4-16
TX Preparation and Dual Access
PC Mode Transmission and Reception
Local Printer and Scanner Operations for PC Interface
Flash Memory Write Operation
Power Save Mode
Fig. 4-4-17
Fig. 4-4-18
Fig. 4-4-19
Fig. 4-4-20
Fig. 4-4-21 (1/2-2/2)
Fig. 4-4-22 (1/2-2/2)
Fig. 4-4-23
Location Programming
Chain Dial
RESTRICT ACCESS
Fig. 4-4-24
Instant Dialing Operation
Reports
Fig. 4-5-1
Fig. 4-5-2
Fig. 4-5-3
Fig. 4-5-4
Fig. 4-5-5
Fig. 4-5-6
Fig. 4-5-7-1
Message Confirmation Report (MCF)
IMAGE in MCF with Memory TX
Activity Report
Active Memory Files
Configuration Report (User)
Service Default Report
Telephone Directory
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - ii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fig. 4-5-8
Fig. 4-5-9
Fig. 4-5-10
Fig. 4-5-11
Fig. 4-5-12
Fig. 4-5-13
Fig. 4-5-14
Protocol Dump Report
Broadcast Entry Report
Broadcast Confirmation Report
Power Outage Report
Confidential RX Report
Call Back Message
Self Diagnosis
FX-051 Tables Index
Table 4-1
Multiple Function Combinations for Transmissions
Multiple Function Combinations for Reception
Functions Combinations for Polling TX/RX
Functions Combinations during Communications
Preparation TX as Dual Access
Table 4-2
Table 4-3
Table 4-4
Table 4-5
Table 4-6 (1/2-2/2)
Table 4-7 (1/2-2/2)
Table 4-8
User Default Setting
Technical Default Setting
Default Setting of Dial Parameters
Plug & Play ID
Table 4-9
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.
OPERATION
For operation, Table 4-1 to Table 4-9, Fig. 4-1 to Fig. 4-5 are attached at the end of this
Section.
4.1
Major Apparatus Appearing on the Machine’s Cabinet
Fig. 3-1, 3-3 and 3-4 shows the machine’s cabinet design for US/CANADA/INT’L versions.
Fig. 3-2 and Fig.4-2-8 also shows a simple illustration of the Paper Loading/Replacement
Procedure. Major apparatus frequently used for machine operations are indicated.
4.1.1 Document Guides
Two sliding guides to hold documents in the central position on the hopper.
The guides are interlocked to widen or narrow when either one of the guides is moved to
the left or right.
4.1.2 Tray-Paper
Recording paper loader (Tray-Paper) is prepared instead of paper cassette.
A tray on which the printed sheets are stacked automatically.
Tray-paper is commonly used as copy stacker also. Paper exit plate separates recording
paper and printed paper.
4.1.3 Document Stacker
A tray on which document sheets are stacked automatically when finished in the read
section.
4.1.4 Control Panel
A panel, on which, are all the controls and indicators to perform and program various
machine operations.
The functions of the controls and indicators will be described later in detail.
The operator can open this panel to remove a jammed document by picking up the jammed
document mark position.
4.1.5 Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)
A feeder having a horizontal slit or inlet to permit documents to be fed in to the read section
automatically, one at a time. Documents of width Letter-size or less can be automatically
fed into the read section. The sub hopper is installed in the document table assy. This
apparatus shall be referred to as “hopper” in the description of the product later.
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.1.6 Manual Paper Feeder
A slot of the manual paper feeder is prepared underneath front face.
4.1.7 AC Inlet
A male-type 3-pin connector to which the furnished AC power cord is connected.
Note: The fuse for the mains is located within the power supply unit to prevent replacement
by the user. When the fuse blows, a service person needs to replace the entire
power supply unit. The location therefore, is not pointed out specifically.
4.1.8 Power Switch
This is the machine’s main AC power switch.
4.1.9 Line Terminal
This connects the machine to telephone line.
4.1.10 Telephone Terminal
This connects the machine to an optional telephone handset and/or an external telephone
unit.
4.1.11 Optional Memory Board Interface
This interface is not provided.
4.1.12 Second Cassette Interface
This interface is not provided.
4.1.13 PC Interface Connector
IEEE 1284 bi-directional parallel interface is supplied to the back side of the machine.
4.1.14 Optional Telephone Handset
This interface is not provided.
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.2
Controls and Indicators on Control Panel (Fig. 3-3)
This Section identifies the locations of controls and indicators provided on Control Panel
and explains their functions briefly. The detail of user and service functions are described
in Section 4.4 “User Functions” and 4.5 “Technical Programming”.
All the control and indicator apparatus are laid on Control Panel for ease of access to and
operation of the control apparatus, except for a few such as the power switch (located on
the back/left in the main cover).
All LED indicators provided on Control Panel are amber except ALARM which is red.
The LCD display provided is capable of indicating two rows of 20 characters.
4.2.1 AUTO REC
Function: Selects the mode from the auto receiving, manual receiving, memory receive
mode, PC mode (by installing the optional software to PC), TEL/FAX automatic
switching, TAD interface modes.
Display:
The LCD display is changed in the order of AUTO RECEIVE MODE, MANUAL
RECEIVE MODE, TEL/FAX AUTO SW MODE, and TAD/FAX SW MODE,
MEMORY RX MODE, PC MODE each time the AUTO-REC key is pressed.
(Refer to Fig. 4-4-3-1/3-3/3.)
4.2.2 Transmit Resolution (YES key)
Function: After having set the document, press the “YES” key to select the transmit
resolution. Sequentially selects the resolution of the document vertical scanning
capability of the machine in the order of STD (Standard), FINE, EXTRA FINE
and PHOTO. The horizontal resolution is fixed to 300 DPI in order to LED head.
300 DPI is available when remote machine has a capability of the 300 DPI
communication.
When the remote machine does not have a capability of 300 DPI communica-
tion, Horizontal resolution is reduced automatically from 300 DPI to 8 dot/mm.
The vertical resolution will vary according to the position selected:
TX
Resolution
STD
FINE
EXTRA-FINE
PHOTO
COPY
RX does not supports 300DPI RX supports 300DPI
200DPI × 3.85line/mm
300DPI × 7.7line/mm
300DPI × 15.4line/mm
300DPI × 7.7line/mm
8dot/mm × 3.85line/mm
8dot/mm × 7.7line/mm
8dot/mm × 15.4line/mm
8dot/mm × 7.7line/mm
←
←
300DPI × 300DPI
←
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PHOTO is applicable when the original document includes half-tone images and
will cause the machine to send the image data in scale grades, using error
diffusion algorithm.
This key has an additional function. During an operation to select a function or
to assign telephone numbers to auto dial codes, the operator can use this key to
move the cursor on LCD display to the left direction.
Note: When COPY button is pressed, selected STD mode will change to
FINE mode automatically. After COPY button was pressed once, it is
possible for the operator to select the resolution at the time of COPY
setting by pressing the Yes key.
Learning function:
The machine memorizes the destination machine’s abilility (resolu-
tion) to each one-touch and auto-dial number in every communica-
tion.
Display:
Default:
Four LED indicators corresponding to STD, FINE, EXFINE and PHOTO. When
PHOTO mode is selected, only PHOTO LED is lit.
Set to STD at the factory delivery.
4.2.3 Type of Original (NO key)
Function: After set the documents, press the “NO key to set the type of original. Sequen-
tially selects the contrast compensating function of the machine in the order of
DARK, NORMAL, and LIGHT to improve the picture quality of document repro-
duced at the receiving end, according to the contrast condition of the original
document.
DARK should be select if the entire color of document is dark with a low contrast
between the printed text and the paper background.
NORMAL is normally selected when the entire color of document is not too dark
nor too whitish, while the contrast between the text and background is clear.
LIGHT is selected when the entire color of document is whitish with a low
contrast between the printed text and paper background.
This key has an additional function. During an operation to select a function or
to assign telephone numbers to auto dial codes, the operator can use this key to
move the cursor on LCD display to the right direction.
Display:
Default:
Three LED indicators corresponding to NORMAL, LIGHT, and DARK.
Set to NORMAL at the factory delivery.
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.2.4 COPY
Function: This key is used for four purposes: document copying, transmission or commu-
nication receipt output, location programming for one-touch or autodial and
service person setting mode.
When document is placed on ADF, the switch serves as a command key to
direct the machine to start a copying operation.
Pressing this key without any document on the feeder causes displaying the
latest transmission result on LCD and pressing this key again within 3 seconds
causes the latest transmission receipt. (Refer to Fig. 4-4-2.)
Pressing this key allows the operator to location programming for one-toch or
auto dial before start of dialing at the end of entering telephone number by ten
key. (Refer to Fig.4-4-21-2/2 )
To set the service person setting mode, either press the FUNCTION key first
and press the COPY key twice or turn on the power supply on while the COPY
key is being held down.
Display:
When a copying operation is initiated, a message to indicate the copying status
of the machine will show up on LCD display. Upon completion of the copying,
LCD display will return to the indication of stand by (current time).
During printing Message Confirmation, a message to indicate the machine status
will show up to LCD display. Upon completion of the printing, the message will
change to stand by (current time).
4.2.5 Select Function
Function: This key is used for triggering selection of various functions. LCD display will
return to standby mode immediately, when pressing this key during selection of
various functions.
Display:
The following message is displayed on the LCD upon pressing this key whether
document is placed on the ADF or not.
SELECT FUNCTION (OT)
MEMORY AVAIL = 100%
The upper line message indicate to press that One touch key to which a desired
function is assigned.
The lower line message indicates the available memory as a percentage (%).
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.2.6 Auto Dial
Function: When pressed, will identify to the machine that the 2-digits code which follows is
an auto-dial code registered in advance.
A total of 70 locations numbered can be programmed.
The operator can use AUTO DIAL with the external handset both on hook and
off hook.
Display:
When pressed, a guidance message will appear on LCD display, prompting the
operator to enter a 2-digits auto dial code.
4.2.7 Keypad
Function: Twelve keys on the keypad function the same as those of a conventional
keypad provided on regular telephone instruments. Numeral keys represent 1
to 0, inclusive, and “ ” and “#,” the corresponding symbols. The operator can
*
use them for:
1) Directory dialing the full-digit telephone number and ID registration to select
a distant station.
2) Assignment of a full-digit telephone number to an auto dial code.
3) Entry of numerical data in the course of programming certain user functions
(for example, report printouts, Date and Time adjustment, Sender ID
selection, etc.).
4) Designation of the first character of the destination ID as the search object
in search dialing.
5) Registration of machine ID, TSI
Display:
When a key is pressed, the numeral or symbol corresponding to the pressed
key will show up on LCD display.
4.2.8 REDIAL
Function: Directs the machine to redial the same telephone number used in the previous
call which failed connection to the called station by some reason (for example,
line busy, no answer, etc.).
This feature is called “Manual Redial,” and made effective immediately every
time
Note: After restoration of power, the machine cannot return to previous opera-
tion condition before the power failure. Restoration of power means that
the voltage returns to the normal value after power failure. Since the
registered data for redial is lost by power failure, the manual redial is not
available by the past data after power failure.
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Display:
A message to indicate the redial state will show up on LCD display.
4.2.9 STOP
Function: When STOP key is pressed twice within 3 seconds during message transmis-
sion, the machine will immediately stop the operation. The half-fed document to
the stacker will come to a halt. To remove the document, open the Control
panel cover upward.
When STOP key is pressed during message reception or during clearing of flash
memory (PROGRAMMING is displayed on LCD) or during pre-feeding, the
machine will not stop the reception. The machine ignores STOP key operation.
Cancellation During TX
Press STOP key twice within 3 seconds to cancel a current session's transmis-
sion.
If the machine is in waiting state of multi-session of transmission or broadcast
transmission, WAITING is displayed on the bottom row of the LCD, the STOP is
pressed one time to go to normal memory cancellation procedure. Refer to Fig.
4-4-7.
Operator can select the session(s) to be canceled in the procedure.
Message STOP is printed in result column on the message confirmation report
(MCF).
Cancellation During RX
Cancellation of memory reception data when STOP key is pressed while re-
corded paper is discharging during memory reception or confidential reception.
When STOP key is pressed during local copying operation, the machine will
stop the copying operation after printing out current page. To remove the
document, open the control panel cover upward, and remove the paper fed half-
way. The recorded paper is automatically discharged.
Another function of this switch is to allow the operator or service man to termi-
nate any key programming operation. All data entered by that time of the
particular programming will be made invalid.
While you are programming, pressing STOP takes you back step-by-step
through the programming functions you have already selected.
Display:
Refer to fig. 4-4-8 for the stop key operation.
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.2.10 START
Function: When pressed, will cause the machine to start up for whatever the operator has
commanded to the machine in advance - for example, message transmission,
manual message reception, technical programming, etc.
Display:
When pressed, a message will appear on LCD display, which identifies the
operation the machine will conduct.
4.2.11 PLUS, PAUSE and SPACE
PLUS is No. 8, PAUSE is No. 9 and SPACE is No. 10
Function: One-Touch keys for PLUS, PAUSE and SPACE have dual functions, according
to the timing at which the key is pressed.
When the operator is dial-selecting a distant location, those keys function as
auto-dial One-Touch keys.
When the operator is programming assignment of telephone numbers to Auto
Dial Codes, those keys represent symbols corresponding to "(plus)", “(space)”
and “(pause command)”, respectively.
“Plus” is used to connect the next telephone number for chain dail.
“Pause” is used to place an interval of 3 seconds between two successive digits
in dialing for the exchange discrimination purpose, wherever required.
“Space” may, or may not, be inserted between digits simply for better readabil-
ity.
Display:
During address selection, the full-digit telephone number assigned to No. 15 will
appear on LCD display. If no telephone number is assigned, LCD display will
show the following example prompt for 3 seconds.
NOT PROGRAMMED
During an auto dial code programming, a symbol corresponding to Pause
Command, or Space will show up at the position where the cursor is located on
LCD display, depending on the key pressed.
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.2.12 One-Touch Keys
Function: One touch keys are used for following purposes.
• single destination designation
• various functions for communication or registration
a) Single destination designation
When used for single destination designation, pressing each key causes the
origination of a call to preregistered destination telephone number.
Following data registration is available for the single destination designa-
tion.
Key number 1-10
• destination telephone numbers
• ID
• alternate destination telephone number
b) Various functions for communication or registration
Operator can select the various functions directly by using one touch key
after pressing SELECT FUNCTION key. "SELECT FUNCTION (OT)" is
displayed on LCD when one touch key can be used for various
preprogramed functions.
example
SELECT FUNCTION (OT)
MEMORY AVAIL.= 100%
These assigned various functions are shown in Fig. 4-3-1 and Fig. 3-7 ~
Fig. 3-9 control panel.
Display:
When pressed to dial select the distant station, the full-digit telephone number
corresponding to the auto dial code assigned to the pressed key will show up on
LCD display.
4.2.13 HYPHEN
Function: This key has two functions.
1) Used as the "+" input key in registering TSI/CSI or Call Back Message.
2) Used as the "-" input key in registering One-touch/Auto dial Tel No. or ID to
switch the PTT parameters.
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.2.14 V. REQUEST/HOOK
Toggle selecting action between activation and deactivation of the voice request initiated by the
operator.
This function does not available in Instant dialing and memory reception. (Table 4-1)
Function: this key has 2 functions.
1) Used as the hook-up/hook-down key while the optional or external tele-
phone set is held on-hook. During hook-up, the built-in speaker allows
monitoring line conditions.
2) Used as the voice request key for triggering conversation request during
communication and connection of the circuit with the telephone set. (Fig. 4-
4-9)
The LCD displays the condition of voice request activating.
4.2.15 SEARCH
Function: Used for search dialing: either manual search or auto search. Destination IDs
are searched from one-touch dial No. 1 through No. 10 and auto dial No. 01 to
70. Also, seach key can be used to find unasigned one-touch and auto dial No.
for location programming.
"Manual search"
When the SEARCH key is pressed, the search menu is displayed on the LCD.
When the key assigned with the first character of the destination ID is pressed, the
searched data is displayed on the LCD display.
"Auto search"
When the SEARCH key is pressed, the search menu is displayed on the LCD.
Each time the SEARCH key is pressed, the search in the sequence of A to Z of
the alphabet takes place.
Search Key can be used for the fist head search of one touch key or Auto dial
codes of unregistration at the time of telephone number registration.
4.2.16 ALARM Indicator
Type: LED, red.
Function: Will be turned on when the machine encounters:
1) Communication error
2) Local alarm condition
No print paper
Document Jam
Paper jam
No toner
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Printer alarm (Printer I/F abnormal, engine error, fan alarm, and fusing unit
error)
cover open
Recording paper jam or printer alarm shall be reset by opening the cover or by
power off and on after remedying the cause. It is necessary to press the STOP
switch in addition in case of a paper jam.
Fig. 4-4-10 shows the LCD display messages in alarm states.
4.2.17 LCD display
Type:
LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) Panel.
Function: Indicates short messages which identify the current status of the machine during
message transmission or which guide the operator to the next step during various
operation and function programming procedures.
The display is capable of indicating two rows of 20 characters. The basic design
concept is such that the top row should show the current or immediately preceding
status of the machine, and that the bottom row should indicate the next step to take
or the resulting current status - however, it should be noted that there are excep-
tions in this design principle.
When the machine is in standby, the top row of LCD will display current Time for no
document and current Data and Time for document on feeder.
The detail of guidance messages will be introduced in Sections 4.3 "Typical
Operations," 4.4 "User Functions," and 4.5 "Service Functions".
4.3
Typical Operations
This section provides information regarding the typical operations of the product, which
includes:
Power Turned On (See Fig. 3-8 and section 4.3.1 for the location of the power switch)
Paper loading (See Fig.3-2)
Typical Transmission - (See Fig. 4-1-1 and 4-4-6)
Typical Message Reception - Auto Mode and Manual Mode (See Fig. 4-1-2 and 4-4-5)
Other Transmission Function (See Fig. 4-3-7 to 4-3-11 and 4-3-14 to 4-3-16)
By going through the description of these typical operations, the reader should be able to
have a general idea of how the machine operates and also become familiar with the terms
used in the subsequent descriptions regarding User Functions and Technical Programming.
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.3.1 Power Turning On
It is assumed that the machine is unpacked and installed on a desk or appropriate stand.
All default conditions (the machine configuration parameters) are assumed as those set at
the factory, including AUTO RECEIVE MODE which is set to ON.
a)
b)
Connect the socket end of the furnished power cord to the AC Inlet, and the other
end to the wall outlet.
Turn Power Switch on.
Refer to Fig.4-4-20.
1)
2)
Initial reset is executed within several seconds.
AUTO RECEIVE will be displayed on the LCD that the machine is ready for
automatic message reception by NO PAPER RECEIVE even before print paper
is loaded.
3)
Machine goes to Power Save Mode when machine detects power save condi-
tion.
Machine shows POWER SAVE MODE PRESS "START" when machine move
to power save mode.
Note: POWER SAVE MODE is not available for ODA version.
ALARM (LED) turned on indicates that the machine needs paper loading.
The machine is ready for automatic message reception into memory, - however, due to the
memory capacity limited, it is not recommendable to leave the machine with no paper for
prolonged time. Load print paper by using the tray as soon as possible.
4.3.2 Paper Loading
Set the recording paper into the paper loader(Tray paper) and press STOP key.
The ALARM indicator will be automatically turned off, and the message on LCD display will
change to Current Time, indicating that the machine is now in the normal standby state
(Auto Receive Mode set to ON).
Note: Paper size must be set by user key operation because the machine cannot detect
the paper size automatically.
4.3.3 Typical Transmission
The step by step operation for typical message transmission in G3 mode will be discussed
with reference to the following figures:
Fig. 4-1-1
Fig. 4-4-6
"Typical Message Transmission"
"Calling Operation"
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Note 1:
For convenience of description, the following assumptions are made for Fig. 4-1-1.
1) Five sheets of A4-size document be transmitted to an address, 3454 2111,
which is placed in standby in Auto Receive Mode. The Date and Time indication
is 14:59 FAX.
2) In One-touch Auto Dialing description, the telephone number, 3454 2111, had
been assigned to One-Touch key No. 1 in advance.
3) In Auto-Dial code Dialing description, the telephone number, 3454 2111, has
been assigned to Auto Dial Code 01 in advance.
4) The machine is available with a feature called "Auto-Start," which can be
enabled or disabled by the user and/or service man.
Note 2:
To dial select a distant station, the machine is available using six different
methods:
1) ON Hook Dialing with Hook key
Pressing Hook key at ON-Hook status.
Machine will establish the connected line and operator can hear the dial tone
from the line. Then, operator can make dialling on real time basis by pressing
the numeric key on the operator panel.
Note: That it is available only when "Real Time Dial" is set to TYPE 2.
2) ON Hook Dialing without Hook key
Pressing numeral key (ON-Hook status)
LCD shows the numbers which are pressed.
Pressing START, then dialling starts entered number which are shown on LCD.
3) Manual Dialing by the use of the dialing facility of an external Telephone unit
connected to the machine.
4) Pressing One-Touch Auto Dial key to which the telephone number is assigned
in advance.
This operation corresponds to the leftmost in Fig. 4-1-1.
5) Pressing AUTO DIAL key followed by a 2-digits auto dial code to which the
telephone number is assigned in advance.
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6) Pressing the SEARCH key causes searching of the registered destinations
(from among one-touch dial No. to 2-digits auto dial code). There are two
following cases in this mode:
• Manual search dial (the fifth flow from the bottom in Fig. 4-4-6)
• Auto search dial (the fourth flow from the bottom in Fig. 4-4-6)
In method 1), the operator uses the local keypad of the machine to dial select
the distant station. The machine can monitor the dialed number and store it in
memory temporarily. This information allows the operator to use REDIAL for
manual redial and/or Auto Redial when the call encounters "line busy" or "no
answer."
In method 4), the operator dial selects the distant station and completes connec-
tion to the distant facsimile facility through the use of the dialing facility of the
external telephone unit. This type of dialing is called "Manual Dialing." No dial
information is stored in the machine, and the features such as "Manual Redial"
and "Auto Redial" are not available for this type of dialing.
In any of the method 1), 2), 4), 5) and 6), the machine stores the address
information in memory. Therefore, the machine can use them for redial pur-
poses. For example, "Manual Redial," and "Automatic Redial," "Broadcast
Transmission," etc.
a) Loading Document Pages on ADF (Automatic Document Feeder)
When the machine is in standby, LCD will continuously display the current
time information on the top line, indicating the standby state of the machine
as:
14:59 T/F
This message corresponds to "1" of Fig. 4-4-6 (Calling Operation)
Open the DOCUMENT GUIDES to the width just enough to accept the
document, and load all five document sheets on the ADF facing down and
the top edge leading aligned into the slit of the ADF. Preliminary feeding
occurs when the documents are set.
On the Control Panel, STD for TRANSMIT RESOLUTION and NORMAL for
TYPE OF ORIGINAL should glow amber, indicating the document scanning
resolution and contrast compensation for use. If the operator wishes to
change the parameters, he/she can do so by tapping the corresponding
YES and/or No.
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In addition, LCD will display:
07/01/1998 14:57 TEL
SELECT LOCATION
which prompts the operator to enter the telephone number of the station to
which the document is to be transmitted.
b) Dialing
Manual Dialing (Local Keypad)
In this mode, the operator needs to tap all digits of the telephone number,
54456182, using the keypad on the Control Panel.
The operator hears a dial tone, and taps "5". The message on the LCD will
be changed to:
5
The first digit entered (in the above example "5") will appear at the rightmost
character position.
As the operator enters the digits serially, the entered digits will show up on
the right of the previous digits, as:
54456182
When the operator completes dialing, the machine will complete dialing
accordingly and the telephone number, 54456182, will remain on the LCD.
The exchange will establish the connection with the called station through
PSTN (Public Switched Telephone Network). Assuming that the call is
answered, the operator will hear CED (Called Station Identification) tone from
the distant station, since it is assumed that the distant station is set to the
AUTOREC in standby. Hearing the CED, the operator presses the START
key.
Pressing the START key causes the machine to switch the line connection
to the facsimile facility, and proceeds to transmit the message. The mes-
sage on the LCD is now changed to:
MANUAL TX START
The machine proceeds to message transmission which is identified by the
"MANUAL SEND MODE" block shown at the rightmost in Figure 4-1-1.
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Manual Dialing (External Telephone)
It is assumed that the operator dials the telephone number by using the
dialing facility provided on the telephone unit. This operation is indicated by
the rightmost in Fig. 4-1-1.
Since the machine is not involved in this dialing operation, the message on
the LCD will remain unchanged, that is Time.
When the operator completes dialing, the exchange will establish connec-
tion with the called station through PSTN (Public Switched Telephone
Network). Assuming the call is answered, the operator will hear CED tone
from the distant station and taps START key in a similar fashion as men-
tioned for Local Keypad Dialing.
Pressing START causes the machine to switch the line connection to the
facsimile facility, and proceeds to transmit message. The message on LCD
is now changed to:
MANUAL TX START
The machine proceeds to send massage which corresponds to the
"MANUAL SEND MODE" block, also shown the rightmost in Fig. 4-1-1.
One-Touch Auto Dialing
It is assumed that the telephone number "00116097784184" had been
assigned to One-Touch No. 1 in advance. The handset is assumed to be
on hook.
The operator taps One-Touch No. 1 on the Operation Panel. This operation
is indicated by the leftmost in Fig. 4-1-1.
The machine immediately responds to the operator's action and the LCD
will display the entire preprogramed telephone number corresponding to
One-Touch No. 1 with a guidance message:
OKI TAKASAKI
YES(START) NO(LOC.)
The message corresponds to " " shown in Fig. 4-4-6, because "AUTO
START" is disabled and the call is originated on hook.
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pressing the START key will cause the machine to seize the line and start
dialing to the exchange. Fig. 4-4-6 shows AUTO START ON in parenthe-
ses, which denotes that there is the case in which the operator does not
need to press the START key when "AUTO START" is enabled.
The message corresponds to " " shown in Figure 4-4-6.
OKI TAKASAKI
DIALING
The dialed digits is shown into the top message line of the LCD as:
0273 56 7890
DIALING
When the machine has completed dialing, the message on the LCD will be
changed to:
0273 56 7890
CALLING
The machine proceeds to send the message which is identified by the
"ONE-TOUCH" block shown in Fig. 4-1-1.
Assuming the call is answered, the operator may hear the CED tone re-
turned from the distant station through the built-in speaker.
Auto-Dial Code Dialing
Assuming the handset on hook, the operator first taps AUTO DIAL key. The
machine responds to the command and displays the following message on
the LCD:
AUTO DIAL NO. ?[_ ]
ENTER 01-70
As an assumption, the desired telephone number has been assigned to
AUTO DIAL 01. Then, the operator taps "01" and the message will be on
the LCD:
OKI HONJYOU
YES(START) NO(LOC.)
The message corresponds to " " shown in Fig. 4-4-6 because "AUTO
START" is disabled and the call is originated on hook. The operator taps
the START key.
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pressing the START key will cause the machine to seize the line and start
dialing to the exchange. Similar to the case of One-Touch Auto Dialing, Fig.
4-4-6 shows AUTO START ON in parentheses, which denotes that there is
the case in which the operator does not need to press START when "AUTO
START" is enabled.
OKI HONJYOU
DIALING
After checking dial tone or elapse time of waiting, all the digits for dialing will
be appeared into the top line of the LCD as:
0495 22 2111
DIALING
When the machine has completed dialing, the message on the LCD would
change to:
0495 22 2111
CALLING
The machine proceeds to send the message which is identified by the
"TWO-DIGIT AUTO DIAL CODE" block shown in Fig. 4-1-1 Assuming that
the call is answered, the operator may hear the CED tone returned from the
distant station through the built-in speaker.
Keypad dialing
Assuming the handset is on hook, the operator can immediately tap the
first digit, "0" in this example case. The machine responds to the command
and displays the following message on the LCD.
0
Thereafter, the operator simply continues to entry the remaining digits in the
telephone number.
00116097784184
The message is shown in Fig. 4-4-6. Upon completion of the entry of the
telephone number, the operator taps the START key.
001160977484184
DIALING
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the machine has completed dialing, the message on the LCD would
change to:
001160977484184
CALLING
The machine proceeds to send the message which is identified by the
"KEYPAD DIAL" block shown in Fig. 4-1-1.
Destination ID search dialing
Any registered destination ID can be searched and direct dialing to the
destination, having the searched ID, is possible. Searching by entering the
all characters of the destination ID is possible, and searching through all
destination IDs is also possible.
(Operation)
The operation explained below as an example is for the search of the
destination ID, "OKI-TOKYO".
(1) Manual search dialing mode
Press the SEARCH key. As the first character is O, press 6 on the key
pad. Since M, N and O are assigned to the 6 key, the LCD displays a
destination ID beginning with M and its dial number as follows:
MINESOTA OFFICE
987654321
As the 6 key is pressed repeatedly, the LCD will display.
OKI-TOKYO
814542111
Pressing the START key in this state causes direct dialing to that
destination.
(2) Auto search dialing mode
Press the SEARCH key twice. As the SEARCH key is pressed repeat-
edly from this state, the LCD will display the destination ID's in the
lexicographical order one at a time, each time the SEARCH key is
pressed as follows:
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ex.
ALASKA COMP.
47924358
ATLANTA G/A
4049126247
CHICAGO OFFICE
398529187
DETROIT BRANCH
824692105
When
is displayed, press the START key.
OKI-TOKYO
DIALING
These search modes are for all destination IDs register for the ONE TOUCH
and AUTO DIAL codes.
c) Document reading timing
Memory available
Memory full
Multi-destination (Broadcast)
Call origination after
all the documents are
read in the memory.
Reading impossible
Destination FUNC. PROGRAMMING 25:
Feeder transmission:
Starting the document
reading when receiv-
ing the CFR signal of
the remote machines
after call origination
Starting the document
reading upon call
origination
INSTANT DIAL
= ON
FUNC. PROGRAMMING 25: FUNC. PROGRAMMING 17: Call origination after
Feeder transmission:
Starting the document
reading when receiv-
ing the CFR signal of
the remote machines
after call origination
INSTANT DIAL
= OFF
MEM./FEEDER SW
= MEM.
all the documents are
read in the memory.
FUNC. PROGRAMMING 17:
MEM./FEEDER SW
= FEEDER
Feeder transmission:
Starting the document Starting the document
reading when receiv-
ing the CFR signal of
the remote machines
after call origination
Feeder transmission:
reading when receiv-
ing the CFR signal of
the remote machines
after call origination
d) Reception of NSF (Personal ID)/CSI
If the machine receives NSF (Non-Standard Facilities) with Personal ID
from the distant station, the message on the LCD will be:
OKI-TOKYO is received as Personal ID
from the distant station.
OKI-TOKYO
SENDING /144
When the machine receives the CSI (Called Subscriber Identification)
without NSF, the message on the LCD will be:
03 3454 2111
SENDING /144
The top line identifies the called subscriber obtained from the CSI and the
bottom line indicates that the document is sent at 14400 bps.
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the machine receives no CSI and no NSF from the distant station, the
message on LCD display will be:
OKI-TOKYO is calling ID which is
registered in One touch key.
OKI-TOKYO
SENDING /144
Calling ID does not registered
in One touch key.
SENDING /144
e) Transmission Starts
After setting the document pages and storing the image data in the memory,
the machine begins the handshaking with the distant station. If the 14400 bps
training is successfully completed, then the machine will start transmitting the
image data in digitally coded form. If the training fails due to the line condition,
an automatic fallback to a lower rate will occur. The result will be indicated on
MCF REPORT.
f) Transmission Ends
When all of the document pages are transmitted successfully, the machine
will automatically display the following message:
RESULT=OK
In either case mentioned above, the message on the LCD will return to time
in about 5 seconds, indicating that the machine is again in standby state.
4.3.4 Other Transmission Function (Fig. 4-3-1)
This machine is provided with other transmission functions listed below.
• Delayed TX
(Fig. 4-3-7)
(Fig. 4-3-9)
(Fig. 4-3-10)
(Fig. 4-3-11)
(Fig. 4-4-16)
• Confidential TX Programming
• Relayed Broadcast initiate
• Polling TX/RX Programming
• TX preparation
If a TX preparation request is made when memory full during reception or data transmission
from memory, the machine sends the documents on the feeder at the completion of the
current send or receive operation. In the operation of TX preparation the document is pre-
feed.
This feature is available for the confidential message TX, relayed broadcast initiate, and
memory transmission.
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.3.5 Typical Message Reception (Auto Receive and Manual Receive Modes)
The product is shipped with its receive mode set to Auto Rec Mode. Therefore, when the
power is turned on, the LCD indicates that the machine is in the auto-receive standby state.
The operator can change the status by pressing the AUTOREC key.
The selection of "AUTO REC", "MANUAL REC", "TEL/FAX AUTO SWITCHING", "TAD
MODE", MEMORY RX MODE and PC MODE (in case of installed the optional software to
PC) appear in turns as the AUTO REC key is pressed. (Refer to Fig. 4-4-3)
Fig. 4-1-2 shows a flow chart illustrating the events which occur when the machine receives
a message from a distant station in both AUTO and MANUAL Modes. Since the operations
shown are all conventional, the explanation is abbreviated.
No Paper Reception
When prior to or during a reception the recording paper runs out, it is possible to receive the
incoming message in the memory, the built-in memory is capable of accumulating the
received data.
Refer to Fig. 4-4-13. The accumulated data is printed out when you push the STOP key
after the new paper is loaded.
Even if the no-paper state (including door open) occurs during ECM reception, the no-paper
reception operation in the ECM mode continues.
No-paper reception ends when the empty area in the memory is filled up then, the displays
of "MEMORY OVERFLOW" appears. The data received in the memory, however, remains
unerased and received data in memory is printed out when you push the STOP key after
the new recording paper is set.
4.3.6 Multiple Function Combination Table for Communication
Some functions may conflict with some others depending on situation.
Refer to Tables 4-1 to 4-5, which cover combinations of the following features in the form of
matrix table: memory TX, delayed TX, confidential message TX/RX, relayed broadcast
initiated, ECM transmission or reception, page retransmission, polling transmission or
reception, no toner reception, and no paper reception.
4.4
User Functions
The operations of typical transmission (manual transmission and auto dial transmission
include one-touch dial, auto dial and keypad dial), typical reception (manual reception and
auto reception), and other transmission function (memory transmission, delayed transmis-
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
sion, confidential transmission, relayed initiate transmission, feeder polling transmission,
and transmission preparation) are described in Section 4.3.
Refer to Fig. 4-1 (1/2 - 2/2 General Key Operation).
4.4.1 Method for Selection Function
Press the FUNCTION key once to enter the mode for selecting the user functions.
Pressing the FUNCTION key again, after setting either mode, cancels the operation. In the
setting mode, the operator can turn the menu level back to the previous selection by
pressing the STOP key.
a)
Selection method
Detailed branching for communication operation or file management shall all be done
according to the guide message on the LCD. The keys (for input) allowed to be
selected by the user shall exist on the panel or LCD screen. The selection method is
roughly classified into the two types as follows:
1)
YES/NO selection
YES and NO are assigned to arrow keys ← and →. To affirm the data on the
LCD, press the YES (←) key. Each time the NO (→) key is pressed, new alterna-
tive data for selection is displayed on the LCD. This method is always available for
the user, except for the serviceman data.
NO (
)
ON
ON/OFF SELECTION
OFF
NO (
)
2)
Multiple number designation
When there are multiple branches, it is possible to select the number (selecting
value) arbitrarily given by the system by pressing the arrow key at the right (NO)
and set it by pressing the arrow key at the left (YES).
NO (
)
NO (
)
1
2
3
1/3/3 SELECT
NO (
)
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
b)
Data registration
Data to be registered is classified into numeric data (ex. password, telephone num-
ber, etc.) and character data (ex. calling party ID, personal ID, destination ID, etc.).
Numeric data is input by using numeric (ten) keys and, if allowed, hyphen key, pause
key (one touch No. 10) and space key (one-touch No. 9) and plus key (one-touch No.
8). When registering the TSI/CSI/CIG, hyphen key can not used. When registering
the telephone number, plus key can not used.
For character data input, ten keys and hyphen key are used. One-touch keys No. 9
and No. 10 are for inputting a space and 'P', respectively. Ten key 0 is assigned for
special character input. When it is pressed twice or more in session, symbols (ex. '!',
'"', '&', etc.) and international characters ('Ä', 'Æ', 'å', etc.) can be input. Press the
"→" key to determine the special character. The space key is used for erasing the
data in all cases. To register the input numeric or character data in the equipment,
press the start key. The "←" and "→" keys are used for cursor movement.
Fig. 4-1 shows the general procedure of key operation.
4.4.2 Print from Message in Memory
Function: To print out the received messages from memory in "MSG.IN MEMORY"
mode, or when the machine has run out of recording paper (including the door
open and the no toner state). When received messages are in the memory,
"MSG.IN MEMORY" is indicated on the LCD.
When printing in the Memory Only Reception, an operator has to print the
received message by the Memory message printing operation. (Refer to Fig.
4-3-8.)
Operation: The operation is shown in Fig. 4-4-13 and 4-4-14.
4.4.3 Print from Confidential Reception Message (Personal Box Print)
Function:
To print out the confidential received messages in the memory with 1-digit
personal box number.
The maximum number of personal boxes is 8. Personal boxes are numbered
1 to 8. When confidential received messages are in the memory, MESSAGE
IN MEMORY." is indicated on the LCD.
Operation: The operation is shown in Fig. 4-3-8.
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.4.4 Operation of Polling Reception
Function:
This feature is effective only when the distant station is ready for polling
transmission.
Operation: The operation of Polling Reception and Cancellation of Multiple Poll are shown
in Fig. 4-3-11 and 4-4-6.
4.4.5 Selection of Reports and Lists
The Report Print allows selecting 6 items shown below.
1. Activity report
2. Broadcast message confirmation report
3. Memory files report
4. Phone directory
5. Configuration list without service default
(* Configuration list with service default report)
6. Protocol dump list
*7. Log Report
Refer to Fig. 4-3-1 and 4-3-12.
*: Effective if service bit is ON.
4.4.5.1 Activity Report
Function:
The function allows the operator to print out the status report manually. A
brief description of "Activity Report" will be given in Section 4.6 Reports and
Lists.
Operation: The operation is shown in Fig. 4-3-1 and 4-3-12.
4.4.5.2 Broadcast Message Confirmation Report
Function:
The function allows the operator to print out the message confirmation report
manually or automatically. A brief description of "Broadcast MCF" will be
given in Section 4.6 Reports and Lists.
Operation: The operation is shown in Fig. 4-3-1 and 4-3-12.
4.4.5.3 Memory Files Report
Function: The function allows the operator to print out the Memory Files report manually.
Operation: The operation is shown in Fig. 4-5-4.
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.4.5.4 Phone Directory
Function: The function allows the operator to print out the Phone Directory report
manually. A brief description of "Phone Directory Report" will be given in
Section 4.6 Reports and Lists.
Operation: The operation is shown in Fig. 4-3-1 and 4-3-12.
4.4.5.5 Configuration Report
Function: The function allows the operator to print out the configuration report manually.
A brief description of "Configuration Report" will be given in Section 4.6
Reports and Lists.
Operation: The operation is shown in Fig. 4-3-1 and 4-3-12.
4.4.5.6 Service Default Report (Configuration Report Service-Bit=ON)
Function:
The function allows the operator to print out the service default report manu-
ally for maintenance purpose. A brief description of "Service Default Report"
will be given in Section 4.6 Reports and Lists.
Operation: The operation is shown in Fig. 4-3-1 and 4-3-12.
4.4.5.7 Protocol Dump List
Function: The function allows the operator to print out the protocol dump list manually.
A brief description of "Protocol Dump List" will be given in section 4.6 Reports
and Lists.
Operation: The operation is shown in Fig. 4-3-1 and 4-3-12.
4.4.5.8 Log Report
Function:
The function allows the operator to print out the log report manually when
Service-Bit=ON. This information is used by Okidata.
Operation: The operation is shown in Fig. 4-3-1 and 4-3-12.
4.4.6 Selection of Counter Display
4.4.6.1 Drum Counter Display
Function:
When I/D unit reaches run-out time, "CHANGE DRUM SOON" is appeared in
LCD. Under above condition, user can see the Drum message and clear.
However, No. of counter is not shown for user (Service-Bit=OFF)
After user changed the Drum and clear operation, "CHANGE DRUM SOON" in
LCD is disappeared.
However, the drum counter clear is possible even if the drum is not at the end
of its lifespan.
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation: The operation is shown in Fig. 4-3-1 and 4-3-13.
4.4.6.2 Toner Counter
Function:
This counter is provided to serviceman to check the number of toner counter.
When Technical Function No.32 (Toner counter clear)=OFF, this counter
message is skipped.
When Technical Function No.32 (Toner counter clear)=ON, this counter is
cleared by operation.
User can clear the Toner counter.
Operation: The operation is shown in Fig. 4-3-1 and 4-3-13.
4.4.6.3 Drum (T) Counter Display
Function:
This counter is provided to serviceman to know the total number of DRUM
counter for the machine.
When service-Bit=OFF, this counter message is skipped.
When service-Bit=ON, this counter is cleared by operation.
Operation: The operation is shown in Fig. 4-3-1 and 4-3-13.
4.4.6.4 Print Counter Display
Function: This counter is provided to user.
Display shows how many times recording paper has been printed. But user
cannot clear this number.
Operation: The operation is shown in Fig. 4-3-1 and 4-3-13.
4.4.6.5 Scan Counter Display
Function: This counter is provided to user.
Display shows how many times document has been passed the ADF. But
user cannot clear this number.
Operation: The operation is shown in Fig. 4-3-1 and 4-3-13.
4.4.7 User Program Menu
This sub section presents default positions and telephone numbers and data programmed
by user.
The kinds of user program are:
1)
2)
One-touch key programming (Fig. 4-3-14)
Auto dial programming
(Fig. 4-3-15)
Destination ID programming
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
Group dial programming
User function programming
Data programming
(Fig. 4-3-16)
(Fig. 4-3-17)
(Fig. 4-3-19, 20, 21)
(Fig. 4-3-22)
Personal BOX programming
MEM. password programming
Restrict ID programming
(Fig. 4-3-23)
(Fig. 4-3-24)
Operation: The operation is shown in Fig. 4-3-1 and 4-3-14.
Note: The machine stops its operation for few seconds (1-2 sec.) during just
programming any data into memory. It is a restriction due to the use of
electrical erasable/rewritable memory, because it is needed the speci-
fied time to re-write data after erasing. You will notice this program-
ming sequence through the LCD message because LCD shows
"PROGRAMMING".
4.4.7.1 One-touch key programming
Function:
Ten one-touch keys permit registering
a. telephone number (numeral, -, P and space) in 32 digits
b. alternate fax telephone number in 32 digits (additional registration)
c. ID for the telephone directory function in 15 characters (alphabets, numeral
and symbols). (One ID can be registered for one key).
Operation: The programming operations are described in Fig. 4-3-1 and 4-3-14.
4.4.7.2 Auto Dial Programming
Function: Auto dial No. 01 to 70 allow registering telephone number in 32 digits (nu-
meral, - P and space) and ID for the telephone directory function in 15 charac-
ters (alphabets, numeral and symbols).
Each auto dial location No. 70 is linked to the Relay Report returning fax
number.
Operation: The programming operations are described in Fig. 4-3-1 and 4-3-15.
4.4.7.3 Group Programming
Function: Grouping some one-touch keys and some two-digit auto dial codes to which
telephone numbers have been assigned. Five group programming are
available.
The group programming makes multiple polling reception and broadcast
operation simple.
Operation: The programming operation is described in Fig. 4-3-1 and 4-3-16.
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.4.7.4 Function Programming
Default table is shown in Table 4-6.
Operation: The operation is shown in Fig. 4-3-1, 4-3-17 and 4-3-18.
01: Default arrangement for message confirmation report (Single location) (ON/OFF)
Function:
To enable or disable the automatic message confirmation printout after a
single location call.
Operation: The operation for setting of default position is described in Figure 4-3-17
and 4-3-18.
02: Default arrangement for message confirmation report (Multiple location) (ON/OFF)
Function:
To enable or disable the automatic printout of the multiple polling recep-
tion and the broadcast.
Operation: The operation for setting of default position is described in Figures 4-3-17
and 4-3-18.
03: Default arrangement for error report MCF (ON/OFF)
Function:
To enable or disable the automatic printout of the error report when error
in communication is detected.
Operation: The operation for setting of default position is described in Fig. 4-3-17 and
4-3-18.
04: Default arrangement for image in MCF (ON/OFF)
Function:
To enable or disable the image in MCF.
Operation: The operation for setting of default position is described in Figure 4-3-17
and 4-3-18. Refer to 4.9.7 Image in MCF.
05: Default arrangement for sender ID (ON/OFF)
Function:
To enable or disable the sender ID.
Operation: The operation for setting of default position is described in Figure 4-3-17
and 4-3-18.
06: Monitor volume selection (H/L/OFF)
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Function:
To enable H or L or disable the line monitory sound.
In case setting H/L, monitor is enable for 5 seconds after dialing.
Operation: The operation for setting of default position is described in Fig. 4-3-17 and
4-3-18.
07: Buzzer volume selection (LOW/MID/HIGH)
Function:
Selects the sound volume of each of the key touch tone, end of communi-
cation buzzer, voice request buzzer and off-hook alarm from the low,
medium and high levels.
Operation: The operation for setting of default position is described in Fig. 4-3-17 and
4-3-18.
08: Default arrangement for closed network (OFF/ T/R /RX)
Function:
To disable or enable (OFF) the access to the FX-048/050VP175VP from
stations which are not registered in one-touch key or two digit auto dial
code.
Operation: The operation for setting of the default position is described in Fig. 4-3-17
and 4-3-18.
09: Default arrangement for TX mode
Function:
To select the mode automatically set up when a document is loaded in the
feeder.
The following combinations are selectable.
STD/NORMAL
EX.FINE/DARK
EX.FINE/LIGHT
STD/DARK
STD/LIGHT
FINE/NORMAL
FINE/LIGHT
PHOTO/DARK
PHOTO/LIGHT
FINE/DARK
EX.FINE/NORMAL
PHOTO/NORMAL
Operation: The operation for setting of default position is described in Fig. 4-3-17 and
4-3-18.
10: Default arrangement for TEL/FAX switchover timer (20 sec/35 sec)
Function:
To specify the time for which the machine alerts you on reception of a call
in the telephone/fax automatic switchover mode.
Operation: The operation for setting of default position is described in Fig. 4-3-17 and
4-3-18.
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11: Ringing response time selection (1 RING/05/10/15/20 SEC)
This selection cannot be changed unless the service bit is set to one in some countries.
Operation: The operation for setting of the default position is described in Fig. 4-3-17
and 4-3-18.
12: Distinctive Ring (OFF/ON/SET)
Function:
To select the ring pattern for FAX to apply distinctive ringing .
Operation: The operation for setting of default position is described in Fig. 4-3-17 and
4-3-18. Refer to 4.9.8 Distinctive Ring.
13: 1'ST Paper Size Selection (A4/LETTER/LEGAL)
Function:
Select the first cassette size.
The operator must select the preferable paper size as the machine cannot
detect the paper size automatically.
Operation: The operation for setting of size is described in fig. 4-3-17 and 4-3-18.
14: User Language (ENGLI/ANOTHER)
A choice of two languages for LCD and print messages are available.
GER, FRE etc. are displayed instead of ANOTHER.
15: Incoming Ring (ON/OFF/DRC)
Function:
To enable or disable the bell signal which is generated by software.
Operation: Refer to Fig. 4-3-17 and 4-3-18.
16: Remote Receive (OFF/00/11/22/33/44/55/66/77/88/99/**/##)
Function:
When operator hooks up the optional or external handset for FAX recep-
tion, operator can switch the line from telephone to FAX by using two-digit
MF tone if the remote receive setting is not OFF.
Two-digit code (00 or 11 or ...... 99 or ** or ##) by keypad is used to
switch the line.
This function is applied to FX-051.
Operation: Refer to Fig. 4-3-17 and 4-3-18.
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
17: Memory TX/Feeder TX switch
Function: To select the transmission mode (MEM. TX/FEED. TX) of default.
This function becomes effective when Instant Dial of No. 26 is set to OFF.
(Refer to P.4-20 Document reading timing)
Operation: Refer to Fig. 4-3-18.
18: Default arrangement for power save mode (ON/OFF)
Function:
To enable or disable the power save.
Operation: The operation for setting of default position is described in Figure 4-3-17,
Fig. 4-3-18 and Table 4-6.
Note:
19: Default arrangement for ECM function (ON/OFF)
Function: To enable or disable the ECM function.
No setting for ODA version
Operation: The operation for setting of default position is described in Figure 4-3-17,
Fig.4-3-18 and Table 4-6.
20: Default arrangement for remote diagnosis (ON/OFF)
Function:
To enable or disable the access to this machine from the remote center
for diagnosis.
Operation: The operation for setting of default position is described in Fig. 4-3-17 and
Fig. 4-3-18.
21: Default arrangement for PC/FAX switch (ON/OFF)
Function:
To enable or disable PC interface function.
When PC reception is not available, for example, application is not
activated on the PC or cable is missing between PC and fax etc., this
setting allows to switch from PC to fax reception automatically.
ON: Automatically change to fax reception
OFF: No reception
Operation: The operation for setting of default position is described in Fig. 4-3-17 and
Fig. 4-3-18.
22: No toner MEM RX
Changing from service function setting to user function setting.
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Function:
To enable or disable MEM RX when toner low condition.
ON: To receive the message in the memory when the remaining toner
level is low or none.
OFF: To print the message even the remaining toner level is low or
none.
23: MEM full save
Function:
Broadcast transmission and other features originate calls after all the
documents read in the memory. When Memory Full occurs during
reading documents and operator time out occur, all the readout data must
be deleted (OFF setting) or all the data must be sent. (ON setting)
Select either ON or OFF setting as follows:
ON: Selecting display
OFF: Selecting delete at all times
Operation: To operation for setting of default position is OFF in Fig. 4-3-18.
24: Continuous tone
Function:
Setting of sounding warning tone after reception.
ON: Warning tone sounding stops by operator's STOP key pressing
OFF: No warning tone
Operation: To operation for setting of default position is OFF in Fig. 4-3-18.
25: Instant dialing
Function:
Setting to start reading documents upon call origination when transmitting.
Refer to attached table "Document Reading Timing". (Page 4-20)
Operation: The operation for setting of default position is enable in Fig. 4-3-18.
26: Restrict Access
Function:
To enable or disable restrict access function.
Restrict ID registration (Fig. 4-3-24) becomes effective when Restrict
Access is set to ON.
Operation: The operation for setting of default position is disable in Fig. 4-3-18.
27: Width Reduction
Function:
Performs the reduction of the horizontal scanning. (However, only when
printing of Copy/reception message.)
See section 4.7.2.1 Variable (reduction) printing.
Operation: The operation for setting of default position is desable in Fig. 4-3-18.
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
28: One-touch keys parameter
Function: To assign the following features combined together as echo protection to
each one-touch key.
Protective tone
Ignoring the 1ST DIS.
Operation: The operation for setting of default position is described in Fig. 4-3-1 and
4-3-17 and 4-3-18.
4.4.7.5 Data programming
Function:
The kinds of data programming are:
1) Clock adjustment
2) System data programming
3) Dial parameter programming
Operation: The operation is shown in Fig. 4-3-1 and 4-3-17.
1. Clock adjustment
Operation: the programming operation is described in Fig. 4-3-1 and 4-3-20.
2. System data programming
Function: The kinds of system data programming are:
a) Registration of TSI/CSI/CIG
TSI (Transmitting Subscriber Identification)
CSI (Called Subscriber Identification)
CIG (Calling Subscriber Identification)
b) Registration of sender ID
c) Registration of telephone number for the call-back message
3. Dial parameter programming
Parenthesis means setting variation. Default table is shown in Table 4-8.
Operation: The programming operation is described in Fig. 4-3-19 (1/4 - 4/4).
Note: Some items from (a) to (n) are available according to PTT's
estriction.
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
a) Redial time (0 to 10 times: one time steps)
b) Redial interval (1 to 6 minutes: one minute steps)
c) Dial tone detection (ON/OFF)
d) Busy tone detection (ON/OFF)
e) MF or DP (MF/DP)
f) DP rate (10/16/20 pps)
g) DP make ratio (33%/39%)
h) DP dial type (N/10-N/N+1)
i) MF duration (75/85/100 ms)
j) PBX Line (ON/OFF)
k) Flash/Earth/Normal (R/E/N)
l) Auto start (ON/OFF)
m) Dial prefix
(0. 1. ... 9)
n) IT2 detect (ON/OFF))
AUTO START:
If the AUTO START is turned ON, dial operation is
automatically started immediately.
If the AUTO START is turned OFF, dial operation is
started when the START key is pressed. If the START
key is not pressed within 60 sec., the machine is initial-
ized.
4.4.7.6 Personal box programming
To allow operator to assigne a two functions to 8 personal-box.
(a) Confidential RX
(b) Bulletin Polling TX
Function:
Used with confidential RX and Bulletin Polling TX and Advanced T30 protocol.
Personal box setting for Bulletin poll using SEP frame and Confidential using
SUB frame when remote machine have a SEP/SUB capability.
Operation: The programming operations are described in Fig. 4-3-1 and Fig. 4-3-22. The
box No. 0 is used for only grobal Bulletin Polling TX.
4.4.7.7 Memory password programming
Function:
Registering the password required (4-digit numerals) for outputting the data
received by Memory Only Reception mode or change from Memory Only
Reception mode.
When the four-digit numeric password is registered, the password input is
required upon outputting documents or change from Memory Only Reception
mode.
Operation: The programming operations are described in Fig. 4-3-1 and Fig. 4-3-23.
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.4.7.8 Restrict ID programming
Function: Restrict ID is a function available only person who knows Password, and this
function can register 24 types of ID when Restrict Access of user's setting No.
26 is set to ON.
Operation: The programming operations are described in Fig. 4-3-1 and Fig. 4-3-24.
4.4.7.9 Printer Counter Clear Selection
The Printer Counter Clear allows selecting 5 items shown below.
1)
2)
3)
Drum counter clear
Toner counter clear .
**
Drum (T) counter .
**
Drum (T) will be used to know the total in-use life of the machine.
4)
5)
Print counter clear .
*
Scan counter clear .
*
Note: When service bit is OFF ** marked functions are not displayed. And * marked
functions are not cleared by operator.
For the flow of key operation, refer to Fig. 4-3-1 and 4-3-13.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Drum counter clear
Operation:
The operation is shown in Fig. 4-3-13.
Toner counter clear
Operation:
The operation is shown in Fig. 4-3-13.
Drum (T) counter clear
Operation:
The operation is shown in Fig. 4-3-13.
Print counter clear
Operation:
The operation is shown in Fig. 4-3-13.
Scan counter clear
Operation:
The operation is shown in Fig. 4-3-13.
4.4.8 Printer Cleaning
Function:
To cleaning the residual toner on the charge roller.
Operation: The cleaning operation is described in Fig. 4-3-24 and 4-3-27.
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.5
Technical Programming (Service Functions)
Technical programming available with this product are classified into five categories, accord-
ing to the nature and method of service functions:
• Local test
• Technical function
• System reset
• Default type set
• PC-Loading
For the flow of technical program of key operation, refer to Fig. 4-3-1 and 4-3-2.
4.5.1 Local test
Function : Local test will be described about the following items.
Operation : The operation Fig. 4-3-3.
1. Self-diagnosis
Flash memory check
RAM check
RAM board check (optional)
Print test
2. Sensor calibration
Adjustment of scanning level
3. LED test
All LEDs will be sequentially turned on for one second each in turn.
ALARM
DARK
NORMAL
LIGHT
STD
FINE
PHOTO
EX-FINE
all LED OFF
all LED ON
4. Tone send test
5. Modem send test
6. Modem receive test
7. Multifrequency (MF) send test
Dual tone multifrequency tone test will be conducted by pressing designate
Key-pad.
8. Tone send test for TEL/FAX.
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.5.2 Technical functions
Parentheses means setting variation. Default table is shown in Table 4-7.
Operation : The operation is shown in Fig. 4-3-4.
01. Service Bit (ON/OFF)
Switching serviceman/user operation where there is a difference between U.S. and FTZ
version, as in TSI/CSI registration for example.
ON : Serviceman's features are available.
OFF : Serviceman's features are not available.
02. Monitor Control (ON/OFF)
Enable/Disable of Monitor.
03. Country Code (USA, INT, GBR, IRL, NOR, SWE, FIN, DEN, GER, HUN, TCH, POL,
SUI, AUT, BEL, HOL, FRE, ESP, ITA, GRE, AUS, NZL, SIN, HNG, POR)
Selection of country.
04. Time/Date Print (OFF/ONCE/ALL)
When select to
OFF : Time and Date are not printed.
Once: Time and Date are printed at the top of the first page only.
All : Time and Date are printed at the top of every page.
05. TSI Print (ON/OFF)
To enable or disable TSI print.
When TSI print is on, the telephone number of the fax machine sending you a fax
message is printed at the top of the each page of the message.
06. TAD Mode (OFF/TYPE1/TYPE2/TYPE3)
Switching of valid or invalid for TAD mode function.
TYPE1 : Machine responds as fax even if CNG was not detected.
TYPE2 : Machine responds as fax only when CNG is detected.
TYPE3 : Machine responds as fax after a certain time (15 sec.) elapses. (CNG is not
detected.)
07. Real Time Dial (OFF/TYPE1/TYPE2)
Selection of real time dialing and the ability to enable or disable this feature.
TYPE1 : Real time dialing is available when the optional hand set is OFF-HOOK.
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TYPE2 : Real time dialing is available when the optional hand set is OFF-HOOK or
press HOOK key.
08. TEL/FAX Switch (ON/OFF)
Switching the TEL/FAX automatic switch function
09. MDY/DMY (MDY/DMY for US/CANADA version. MDY/DMY for INT'L version)
Refer to Table 4-7.
Switching LCD display and report print from month/day/year to day/month/year.
10. Long Document Scan (ON/OFF)
Switching the function of scanning long-size documents (more than 360 mm).
ON : 1500 mm or 60 min.
OFF : 360 mm or 60 min.
11. Tone for Echo (ON/OFF)
Switching this function applicable to poor circuit quality of overseas transmission, etc.
Note: Both ignoring 1st DIS (No. 14) and protective tone (No. 16) are switched at the
same time in setting of one-touch key parameter.
12. MH only (ON/OFF)
Switching the function of limiting image compression to the MH code.
13. H/MODEM RATE (14.4 k/9.6 k/4.8 k)
Selection of H/MODEM RATE for TX/RX
14. T1 (TX) Timer Value (010 - 255)
Registers the time duration (in seconds) for which FX-051 waits for the remote station's
answer. This timer starts when the last dial digit has been sent in the automatic trans-
mission mode.
15. T1 (RX) Timer Value (010 - 255)
Registers the time duration (in seconds) for which FX-051 waits for the remote station's
answer. This timer starts when the automatic reception is started.
16. T2 Timer Value (001 - 255)
Registers the time duration (in seconds) for which FX-051 watch for the EOL interval.
This timer starts when the last EOL has been received.
(in 100 ms steps)
17. DIS BIT 32 (ON/OFF)
To enable or disable the DIS BIT 32. Refer to 4.8.14.
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
18. Error Criterion (00-99)
To select the error criterion ratio. Refer to 4.8.13.
19. Off-Hook Bypass (ON/OFF)
Switching the function of maintaining communication without hooking up the telephone
set in usual test, etc.
20. Non-Loaded (NL) Equalizer (0, 1.8, 3.6, 7.2km)
Determining the equalizing level of the receiving signal.
0, 1.8, 3.6 and 7.2km are selectable.
Definition:
Equalizing level is the difference of gain of equalized signal between 0.3
kHz and 3.4 kHz.
21. Attenuator (0 to 15 dB)
Adjusting the attenuation (dB) for the send signal power level.
22. T/F Tone Attenuator ( 0 to 15 dB)
Adjusting the attenuation (dB) for the tone send signal for TEL/FAX switching.
23. MF Tone Attenuator (0 to 15 dB)
Adjusting the attenuation (dB) for the MF tone send signal power level.
24. Ring Duration Detection Time (100 MS - 990 MS)
Selection of minimum ring detection time according to each country's requirement.
The time is selectable between 100 MS and 990 MS by 10 MS step.
25. CML Timing (100 MS - 1900 MS)
Selection of the time from end of the ring to CML-ON.
The time is selectable between 100 MS and 1900 MS in 100 MS step.
26. LED Head Strobe (00000 - 11111)
Selection of strobe width in LED head.
"00000" is lightest and "11111" is darkest.
27. LED Head Width
To switch the type of LED head whose width is TYPE1 (2496 bit) or TYPE2 (2560 bit).
28. MEDIA TYPE (M/MH/H)
The recording paper quality is selectable among Medium, Medium-heavy and Heavy.
29. TR Latch Current (-2/-1/0/+1/+2)
To select the latch current for transfer roller.
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
30. NSF Switch (ON/OFF)
NSF signal transmitting selectable.
31. ID/TSI Priority (ID/TSI)
Selects ID/TSI printing in the distant station ID column of the report.
32. Toner Counter Clear (ON/OFF)
Selects whether this function of toner counter clear operating is permitted for user or not.
33. Parallel Pickup (ON/OFF)
Selects the effective/invalid of the parallel pickup function.
4.5.3 PTT Parameter
Default table is shown in Table 4-8.
Note : this table is typical value.
Operation: The programming operation is described in Fig. 4-3-1, 4-3-2 and
4-3-6.
a) PTT parameter (Country code)
[INT]
[HUN]
[POR]
[GBR]
[TCH]
[ESP]
[IRL]
[POL]
[ITA]
[NOR]
[SUI]
[SWE]
[AUT]
[AUS]
[FIN]
[BEL]
[NZL]
[DEN]
[HOL]
[SIN]
[GER]
[FRE]
[HNG]
[GRE]
[LTA]
[MEX]
[USA]
4.5.4 System reset
Function : To clear or initialize the following data:
1. All data
2. Location data
3. Configuration data
Operation : The operation is shown in Fig. 4-3-1, 4-3-2, 4-3-5.
4.5.5 Default type set
This function is distination countries setting. When changing this setting, all data is initialized
except the counter value.
4.5.6 PC-Loading
This function is possible to rewrite the Flash memory.
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.6
Reports and Lists
This Section presents the formats of reports and lists referred in the preceding paragraphs,
with some example entries for reference purposes.
The formats are attached to the last of Section 4 for reference purposes (Fig. 4-5-1 to 4-5-13
for US/CANADA/INT'L version.)
Brief descriptions for the items and sample data are given for the reader's convenience in
understanding the meaning and purpose thereof, except for those which are seemed self
explanatory.
The method to print out the reports and lists are in the flow charts Fig. 4-3-1 and Fig. 4-3-12.
4.6.1 Message confirmation report
Format
: See Fig. 4-5-1 and 4-5-2.
Fig. 4-5-2 is only printed out by automatic report print mode after completion of
memory TX.
Purpose
Method
: To check the result of transmission just conducted or previous done.
: The report will be manually or automatically printed out.
Descriptions : 1. Title of the report
2. Date and time when the report was printed
3. Sender ID
4. Total transmission and reception time
5. Date of transmission or reception
6. Time when the communication started
(Time is not printed by automatic print out mode.)
7. Length of time for which the FX-051 was connected to the line
8. Identification of the remote station
Personal ID/CSI/Location ID/Dial number
9. Mode of the communication
Calling/Called/B.C. (Broadcast)/BOX
10. Total number of pages in particular communication
11. Result of the communication
OK/NO/STOP/COMP./BUSY/PAPER/S JAM/R JAM/COVER
12. Service code
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13. Number of pages stored in memory
Page number is printed only in case transmission from memory is
carried out.
14. Page numbers of the pages to which an RTN signal or a PIN signal
received.
The asterisk (*) mark indicates that retransmission of the page met the
criteria of copy quality.
4.6.2 Activity report
Format
: See Fig. 4-5-3.
Purpose
: To provide the user with a comprehensive communication record listing for his
administrative or management purposes.
When paper RX is completed normally, result of the communication is not
printed in the report. But in memory RX, result of the communication is always
printed in the report.
Method
: The report will be manually printed out.
Descriptions : 1. Title of the report
2. Date and time when the report was printed
3. Sender ID
4. Total TX and total RX time
5. Date of transmission or reception
6. Time when the communication started
7. Length of time for which the FX-051 was connected to the line
8. Identification of the remote station
Personal ID/TSI/Location ID/Dial number
9. Mode of the communication
Calling/Called/B.C. (Broadcast)
BOX = ∆ ∆ (Mail box number)
10. Total number of pages in particular communication
11. Result of the communication
OK/NO/STOP/BUSY/PAPER/COMP. (Completion of a broadcast)/S
JAM / R JAM / COVER / PUNIT / CANCL
12. Service code
4 - 43
40672201TX Rev.4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.6.3 Broadcast confirmation report
Format
Method
: See Fig. 4-5-10.
: The report will be manually or automatically printed out.
Descriptions : 1. Title of the report
2. Date and time when the report was printed
3. Sender ID
4. Total numbers of pages in particular communication
5. Specified transmission time
(Time is not printed by automatic print out mode.)
6. Total transmission time
7. Required transmission address (One-touch dial)
8. Registered location ID (One-touch dial)
9. Required transmission address (Auto dial)
10. Registered location ID (Auto dial)
11. Required transmission address (Ten key dial)
12. Transmitted number or pages for each address
13. Identification of the result of communication
4.6.4 MEMORY Files report
Format
Method
: See Fig. 4-5-4.
: The report will be manually or automatically printed out, for information of
transmission/reception data stored in the memory.
Descriptions : 1. Title of the report
2. Date and time when the report was printed
3. Sender ID
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Reception data
• Prints the information of no paper/no toner reception.
• ENTRIES is the number of received communication stored in the
memory.
• PAGES is the number of total pages of the received messages stored
in the memory.
5. Personal Box
• Prints the opend condition of personal Box.
• MODE shows the type of Box.
• ENTRIES prints the number of receipt stored in the memory.
• PAGES prints the number of total pages of each Box.
6. Polling TX/RX
• Prints the information of Polling RX or Polling TX of unused Box.
• Polling TX prints "MODE" column and the number of read pages. (when
Feeder Polling TX, the number of read pages is a blank.)
• Polling RX prints the communication date and time, distant station ID
and MODE.
7. Transmission
• Prints the information of Delay memory transmission and Redial.
(However, Polling RX information is printed out on the above item 6 on
the page 4-45)
• The communication date and time, distant station ID and Mode are
printed.
Note: When there is no stored image data in the memory at all, this Active
Memory Files is not printed out. (NO DATA IN MEMORY)
4.6.5 Configuration reports
Format
: See Fig. 4-5-5.
Purpose
: To allow the user or serviceman to obtain a list of features and functions
available with the machine, so that he can rearrange the machine configuration
for a most efficient operating environment with the machine.
Descriptions : 1. Title of the report
2. Date and time when the report was printed
3. Sender ID
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. User programmed function parameters
Function parameters are shown in sub-section 4.4.5.4.
5. Telephone and call back number
6. Dial parameters
4.6.6 Service default report (configuration report: service-bit = ON)
Format
Method
: See Fig. 4-5-6.
: The report will be manually printed out for maintenance purpose.
Descriptions : 1. Title of the report
2. Date and time when the report was printed
3. Sender ID
4. User programmed function parameters
5. Telephone and call back number
6. Dial parameters
7. Function parameters are shown in sub-section 4.5.2.
4.6.7 Telephone directory
Format : See Fig. 4-5-7-1, 4-5-7-2 and 4-5-7-3.
Descriptions : Three pages for FX-051.
(1/2)
1. Title of the report
2. Date and time when the report was printed
3. Sender ID
4. Programmed ID (15 characters) *1
5. Programmed one-touch telephone numbers (for FAX)
6. Programmed alternate telephone numbers (for FAX)
7. Programmed one-touch parameters
8. Programmed auto-dial telephone numbers (for FAX)
*1 One-touch dial 01 to 10
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(2/2)
1. Title of the report
2. Date and time when the report was printed
3. Sender ID
4. Group number (#1 - #5)
5. Programmed one-touch numbers (01 - 10)
6. Programmed auto-dial numbers (01 - 70)
4.6.8 Protocol dump data printing
Format
: See Fig. 4-5-8.
Purpose
: To allow the serviceman to obtain a list of protocol signals transferred between
the transmitter and receiver.
Method
: The report will be manually printed out for maintenance purpose.
Descriptions : 1. Title of the report
2. Date of communication
3. Time of communication
4. One message transmission/reception time
5. Identification of remote station
• CSI and/or telephone number
6. Mode of transmission/reception according to ITU-T designation
7. Total number of pages in communication
8. Identification of the result of the communication
9. Service code
10. Communication protocol
11. TX: DIS/DTC /NSF/ NSS/ NSC
12. RX: DIS/DTC/NSF/NSS/ NSC
13. Received telephone number
14. Transmitted telephone number
15. Received SEP/SUB
16. Transmitted SEP/SUB
4.6.9 Log Report
Purpose
: The report will be manually printed out for fault analysis.
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.6.10 Broadcast entry report
Format
: See Fig. 4-5-9.
: To allow the operator to obtain a list of entered locations for the broadcast.
Purpose
Descriptions : 1. Title of the report
2. Date and time when the report was printed
3. Sender ID
4. Session number
5. Specified transmission time
6. Reserved transmission address (One-touch dial)
7. Registered location ID (One-touch dial)
8. Reserved transmission address (2 digit auto dial)
9. Registered location ID (2 digit auto dial)
10. Reserved transmission address (Ten key dial)
Five locations are available.
4.6.11 Confidential RX report
Format
: See Fig. 4-5-12.
Purpose
: To inform the operator about a stored confidential message in the memory.
4.6.12 Power OFF report
Format
: See Fig. 4-5-11.
Purpose
: To indicate AC power failure and recovery and in case of destruction of accu-
mulated picture data in Memory. The information printed on the Power OFF
report is not printed out on the Activity report.
Method
: The report will be automatically printed out when the AC power is restored.
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.6.13 Call back message
Format
: See Fig. 4-5-13. (Call back message)
: To send a prepared message to destination.
Purpose
4.7
Restrictions by the Printer
4.7.1 Printing time
0
5
7.5
10
15
For FX-051
Approximately
Printing
start
1st
2nd
3rd
page
feed-
ing
page
feed-
ing
page
feed-
ing
1st
2nd
page printing
3rd
page printing
page printing
1st
2nd
page
ejec-
tion
page
ejec-
tion
1st page
2nd page
7.5 seconds
7.5 seconds
3rd page
8 pages of A4-size paper per minute
As illustrated above, it takes about 7.5 seconds to print on a page of A4-size paper by the
printer used in FX-051. While the printing time is fixed, the communication time varies
considerably depending on the complexity of the document image. To match the printing time
to the communication time, FX-051 starts printing after receiving the image data for a page.
FX-051 prevents memory overflow by controlling the communication time by the following
method.
Line
End
dis-
connection
indication
by buzzer
Call
reception
Image data
for 1st page
received
Image data
for 2nd page
received
Image data
for 3rd page
received
Image data
for 4th page
received
Communi-
cation
1st
page printed
2nd
page printed
3rd
page printed
4th
Printing
page printed
7.5 seconds
7.5 seconds
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.7.2 Printing area and image scaling
4.7.2.1 Variable (reduction) printing
FX-051 uses cut-sheet papers of A4, letter, and legal sizes.
FX-051 (US), for example, reads a document at 8 dots/mm x 7.7 lines/mm and sends it to
remote TX-051 (US).
On the other hand, FX-051 (US) at receiving side receives the document, then converts the
horizontal resolution from 8 dots/mm to 300 dots/inch and the vertical resolution from 7.7 lines/
mm to 784 lines/inch using image smoothing process. And also 784 to 1076 lines/inch (variable
resolution) is available for vertical printing.
Inapplicable
Standard
No.
1
Standard Specification
FX-051specification
Vertical scanning resolution
The original image is reduced by 73 %
to 100 %. (Except EX-Fine Copy mode)
CCITT T4.2.1
CEPT 5.1.4
18R53 7.2.1
The vertical scanning resolution
should be 3.85 lines/mm ± 1 % for
7.7 lines/mm ± 1 %
Horizontal scanning resolution
2
203.2 mm ± 1 %
CCITT T4.2.2
CEPT 5.1.1
18R53 7.3.1
User Function No.27 (Width Reduction)
ON: The original image is reduced by 95%
The detail is shown as below:
(1) COPY
The length of ahorizontal scanning
line should be 215 mm ± 1 % for
1728 white-band-black picture elements
a. STD copy
• A4 size paper : 97.9%
• Except A4 size paper : 94.5%
b. FINE/EX. FINE/PHOTO copy
• A4 size paper : 97.5%
• Except A4 size paper : 95.0%
(2) Received data
• 8pel/mm : 94.1%
• 300DPI : 92.6%
0.6 mm to 8.1 mm
When A4-size papers are used, the
first received line must be printed in the
position of 0 mm to 4 mm from the top
of the paper.
3
CEPT 5.1.5
18R53 7.6.1
Since the available printing area of the printer is smaller than the paper size, document
contents may be missed on both sides of the paper, or a document image having the same
length as the printing paper may be split into separate pages in printing. To prevent these,
FX-051 automatically adjust itself to the proper reduction ratio within the following range.
73 to 100% (US: Letter paper)
78 to 100% (INT’L: A4 paper)
Note: The difference of the range depends on memory size and paper size.
4.7.3 Operation on alarm occurrence during printing
If a power failure or a printer alarm (including paper run-out alarm) occurs during printing of a
received image, the image data already received and stored in the memory is regarded as no-
paper received data. After the recovery from the failure, printing of the received image data
automatically starts with the interrupted page, for FX-051 cannot reproduce the data for power
failure.
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.7.4 Heater control
The temperature of the toner fixing heater is lowered in the standby state to reduce power
consumption and heat generation. The heater control operation is shown below.
Heater start *
* The heater is started by call reception.
The preliminary procedure is performed and image data for the
first page is received in this period.
Printing start
1st
page printing
1st page ejection
Heater warming time
(seconds typ.)
Approx.
seconds
• The printer is normally placed in the standby.
If a call is received in this state, the heater is started; however, it takes a typically of 20
seconds for start printing. (This does not make longer the transmission time for document
images such as ITU No. 1 sample document because, when a call is received the heater
turned to ON, and printing of the first page starts after the preliminary procedure is per-
formed and received image data.)
4.7.5 Warming up of the printer
The printer starts the warm-up sequence to warm the toner fixing heater immediately after the
power is turned on.
4.8
Other Functions
4.8.1 Language
Selection of 2 languages shown on LCD and printed on reports is available to the user.
Language selection is available for destination.
Default
: Refer to Table 4-6.
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.8.2 Incoming Ringer
Bell signal is generated by software for several countries (Holland, Belgium, New Zealand
etc.) of INT'L version because ring circuit is not installed for the these countries.
Therefore, the machine must make a bell signal and generate the bell sound through a
speaker.
Function
: Machine will decide to enable or disable this function using NCU
selfcheck function automatically.
2400 Hz/16 Hz bell sound is generated by detecting ring signal timing.
4.8.3 CML-ON timing
Function : To meet various countries requirements, CML-ON timing is selectable
from 100 ms to 1900 ms in 100 ms step.
Default
:
To meet various countries requirements.
4.8.4 Real time dialing
Function
: Real time dialing condition is selectable to meet various countries require-
ments.
TYPE 1
TYPE 2
OFF
: Real time dialing is available at OFF-HOOK.
: Real time dialing is available at both OFF-HOOK and press HOOK key.
: Real time dialing is not available.
Default
: To meet various countries requirements.
4.8.5 Ring duration time
Function
: To meet various countries requirements.
Ring duration time is selectable from 100 ms to 990 ms in 10 ms steps.
4.8.6 PC printer mode
Machine works as 300 DPI printer of PC and also works as Quasi-600 DPI (300 x 1200 DPI)
by using attached printer driver and application software which are provided by OKIDATA.
For details, please refer to appendix “MFP product specification”.
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.8.7 Hyper power save mode (This wording is tentative)
To decrease the machine's power consumption, machine supplies power only for Control
Panel circuit and a part of NCU board circuit in standby mode.
Refer to Fig.4-4-20
Machine shows *POWER SAVE MODE PRESS "START" during power save mode.
Main power turned on conditions:
1) When Power switch is turned on.
2) When Start key is pressed on standby condition (all other key operations are ignored
without key touch tone)
3) When ring signal from out side line is detected.
4) When Off Hook (hand set) is detected.
5) When PC1 (Document) is detected for TX or COPY.
Main power turn OFF conditions:
Main power is turned off automatically when the main power off timer (180 seconds)
is activated and after which machine becomes real standby mode.
Real standby mode does not allow following conditions:
1) When power save mode setting is OFF by user.
2) When operation is activated such as FAX TX/RX, local copy, report printing, during key
operation, PC interface mode, warming up, maintenance mode.
3) Hook up condition
4) Alarm condition
5) When image data is stored in memory (memory reception, confidential reception,
memory transmission)
6) Delayed TX mode or waiting for redial
7) When manual recording paper feed is detected.
Refer to Fig. 4-4-20.
4.8.8 V34 (33.6/22.8KBPS) MODEM
V34 MODEM is not available.
4.8.9 FAX forwarding
This function is not available.
4.8.10 Cleaning Page mode
To remove residual impurities from printing surfaces or to reduce problems such as repeating
marks, blotching, and shading.
Operation:
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To generate a cleaning page on the FX048 series, press the SELECT FUNCTION key once
then press OT10 key and NO key twice. LCD display shows PRINTER CLEANING, then
press YES key and PRINTER CLEANING EXECUTING is displayed. Machine will return to
stand by mode after the cleaning procedure. Refer to Fig. 4-3-24 and Fig. 4-3-27.
4.8.11 Image in MCF
To enable or disable the message in MCF setting.
This is printed at the bottom of the message confirmation report and can help operator to
inform which document transmit
User can set to off the IMAGE IN MCF when user does not want to disclose the sending data
to other people.
4.8.12 Distinctive Ring
Distinctive ringing is a service offered by telephone carriers that allow you
to have several different numbers on one line, each with its own distinctive ring.
In this way, when you get an incoming call, you can identify what number is
being called by the ring pattern.
(Your local telephone carrier can provide you with more information about this
service. This service is usually offered as a monthly charge to your normal phone bill).
By this setting, your fax machine has a distinctive ringing function that allows you to register
one additional distinctive ring pattern.
Then, you can change or cancel the distinctive ring setting anytime.
Learning the ring pattern for automatic answering is available. Default setting is OFF.
4.8.13 Error Criterion Value
To select the scatter error (error criterion) ratio to determine the RTN response at the time of
reception to meet the PTT approval.
This is error decision value for the reception in non-ECM mode.
Machine will respond RTN instead of MCF for the post command.
Refer to Table 4-7.
4.8.14 DIS BIT 32
To select on/off to apply to PTT approval.
To improve compatibility between this machine and other company’s machines. Refer to
Fig.4-3-4-2/3 and Table 4-6-1/2.
Reception of extra fine, 14.4K bps and SEP/SUB function are not available for the other
company’s machines when this setting is OFF.
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.8.15 T1(TX) and T1 (RX) Timer Value
T1(TX) timer name is changed from T1 T.O.
Refer to Fig.4-3-4-2/3 and Table 4-7.
T1 (RX) timer is reception side.
This setting is added to apply to PTT approval from this series.
Refer to Fig.4-3-4-2/3 and Table 4-7.
4.8.16 T2 Timer Value
T2 timer value means that EOL interval timer.
This setting is added to apply to PTT approval from this series.
Refer to Fig.4-3-4-2/3 and Table 4-7.
4.8.17 TAD I/F
Machine will detect DTMF from distant station and turn to auto-reception mode even if the
machine is under TAD recording mode.
Refer to Fig.4-4-3 and Fig.4-4-12.
4.8.18 Parallel Pick Up
Refer to Fig.4-3-18-2/3.
When user has connected external telephone line to this machine and number for REMOTE
RECEIVE is entered, then this function is available.
Remote reception (Operator can change if recognized as fax called station) is available from
external telephone for FX-051.
Tentative information:Parallele telephone connection is available for this function if the PTT
allows it.
4.8.19 Oki High Speed Protocol for 14.4K
To improve transmission time for 14.4Kbps rate.
4.8.20 Error report ON/OFF
To enable or disable the automatic print out of a message confirmation report upon a commu-
nication error.
In single location transmission, the MCF report is an error report when function No.01
MCF.(SINGLE-LOCATION) is ON.
In other words, single location transmission of function No.01 includes No.03.
Then No.03 is ON during multi-location transmissions, an error report is printed out for each
individual communication error.
An error report which is different from No.02 is printed out for each single location.
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.9
4.9.1 300DPI function
For FAX communication
New Functions and changed operations
For Local copy and PC scan in horizontal resolution
For Printer
4.9.1.1 TX mode
When EXTRA FINE mode is selected, the machine will transmit in the following resolution.
[Transmit resolution]
300 x 300 DPI
[Remote RX machine’s ability]
300 DPI and EX. FINE are available
300 DPI is not available, EX. FINE is available
300 DPI and EX.FINE are not available
8 dots/mm x 15.4 lines/mm
8 dots/mm x 7.7 lines/mm
In case the machine has no learning function data (not memorize the resolution ability data of
remote machine), the machine will be activated in FINE even if the EXTRA FINE mode is
selected.
In case the memorized learning data and remote machine’s ability are not matched, the TX
machine will convert the scanned data to the remote machine’s ability and send it without
error.
4.9.1.2 RX mode
In reception mode, TX side machine will automatically fit the data to receive preferably and
print it out.
4.9.1.3 COPY mode
When the operator selectes EXTRA FINE, the machine will make copy in 300 DPI x
15.4 lines/mm resolution.
In case the operator selectes FINE, the machine will scan in 300 DPI x 7.7 lines/mm resolution.
In case the operator selectes STD, the machine will scan in 200 DPI x 3.85 line/mm resolution.
4.9.1.4 PC scanner mode
Machine works as 300 DPI scanner of PC by using attached scanner driver and application
software which are provided by OKIDATA.
For details, please refer to appendix “MFP product specification”.
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.9.2 TX preparation and dual access
For the patterns of Dual Access and the description of the Dual Access, refer to Table 4-5
Dual Access Combination Table and Fig. 4-4-16 TX Preparation and Dual Access.
Reception is available during printing from the memory reception.
Reception is available during scanning the document into the memory.
Memory reception is available during printing from memory reception.
Copy is available during memory TX.
Memory RX is available during copy.
4.9.3 TR Latch Current
This switch purpose is the same as PN232 printer for FX-051.
To add adjustable function for transfer roller.
4.10
Point of difference for FX-048
4.10.1 Deleting BROADCAST/FEEDER selection
4.10.2 Instant Dialling
Starting the reading of documents upon call origination after assigning the destination.
Shortening the time up to the reading finished by starting the reading upon call origination.
(Refer to 4-20 Document reading timing)
Reading timing of conventional machines (FX-048 series) was shown as follows:
When FEEDER setting:
When MEMORY setting:
Starting the reading after shifting to Phase C
Starting call origination after all the documents are read in the
memory
4.10.3 MEMORY FILES REPORT added
Printing the list of received but not printed yet documents and waiting documents for transmis-
sion stored in the memory. (Refer to Fig. 4-5-4)
4.10.4 RESTRICTED ACCESS function added
Restricted Access limits accessible users by setting a password beforehand. Inputting the
password then enables the user's access to the machine (FAX terminal).
(Refer to Fig. 4-3-1, Fig. 4-3-24, 4.4.7.8)
4.10.5 PC Loading added
PC Loading automatically rewrites the program stored in the machine by using PC. This
function is only for serviceman. (Refer to Fig. 4-3-2)
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.10.6 Personal BOX
This function can set BOX No. (1 to 8) as Confidential reception/Bulletin Polling assigning.
(Refer to 4.4.7.6, Fig. 4-3-22)
4.10.7 BULLETIN POLLING
A kind of polling transmission.
Bulletin polling enables polling transmission many times until deleting the documents stored in
the memory. (Refer to Fig. 4-3-11, Fig. 4-3-22)
4.10.8 Displaying 4-figure Christian era
4-figure Christian era is LCD displayed and printed in the Report.
4.10.9 CONTINUOUS TONE
By this function, the warning tone sounds at the time of end of reception, and sounding of
warning tone is continued till operator presses STOP key or the machine performs some
operation. (Refer to 4.4.7.4, Fig. 4-3-18)
4.10.10Memory Password
Registering the password required (4-Digit numerals) for outputing the data received by
Memory Only Reception mode or change from Memory Only Reception Mode. (Refer to
4.4.7.7, Fig. 4-3-23, Fig. 4-4-3-3/3)
4.11
Reference for wordings between this series and current machines
Modified wording LCD and reports from previous machines
(User functions)
PRINT COF. RX MSG.
DELETE MAIL BOX
PC PRINTER
-->
-->
-->
-->
PRINT PERSONAL BOX
DELETE PERSONAL BOX
PRINTING FROM PC
SCANNING TO PC
Fig. 4-3-22
Fig. 4-3-22
Fig. 4-4-18
Fig. 4-4-18
PC SCANNER
(Technical functions)
CPU PROG1 PROG2
-->
CPU PROG
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TECH. PROGRAMMING
(Fig. 4-3-2)
(Fig. 4-3-3)
1
LOCAL TEST
STANDBY MODE
POWER ON
COPY
1: SELF DIAGNOSIS
2: SENSOR CALIBRATION
3: LED TEST
FUNCTION
4: TONE SEND TEST
5: MODEM SEND TEST
6: MODEM REC. TEST
7: MF (TONE) SEND TEST
8: TONE (TEL/FAX) TEST
SELECT FUNCTION
COPY X 2
OT1
OT2
(Fig. 4-3-7)
(Fig. 4-3-8)
DELAYED TX
2
PRINT OPERATION
(Fig. 4-3-4)
TECH. FUNCTION
01: SERVICE BIT
PRINT MEMORY MSG.
PRINT PERSONAL BOX
02: MONITOR CONT.
03: COUNTRY CODE
04: TIME/DATE PRINT
05: TSI PRINT
OT3
OT4
OT5
OT6
(Fig. 4-3-9)
(Fig. 4-3-10)
(Fig. 4-3-11)
(Fig. 4-3-12)
CONFIDENTIAL TX
06: TAD MODE
07: REAL TIME DIAL
08: TEL/FAX SWITCH
09: MDY/DMY
10: LONG DOC.SCAN
11: TONE FOR ECHO
12: MH ONLY
RELAY INITIATE - TX
POLLING TX/RX
REPORT PRINT
1: ACTIVITY REPORT
13: H/MODEM RATE
14: T1 (TX) TIMER VALUE
15: T1 (RX) TIMER VALUE
16: T2 TIMER *100MS
17: DIS BIT32
18: ERR.CRITERION
19: OFF HOOK BYPASS
20: NL EQUALIZER
21: ATTENUATOR
22: T/F TONE ATT.
23: MF ATT.
2: BROADCAST MCF.
3: ACTIVE MEM. FILES
4: PHONE DIRECTORY
5: CONFIGURATION
6: PROTOCOL DUMP
LOG. REPORT
OT7
(Fig. 4-3-13)
COUNTER DISP (CLEAR)
24: RING DURA. *10MS
25: CML TIMING *100MS
26: LED HEAD STROBE
27: LED HEAD WIDTH
28: MEDIA TYPE
DRUM COUNTER
TONER COUNTER
DRUM (T) COUNTER
PRINT COUNTER
SCAN COUNTER
29: TR LATCH CURRENT
30: NSF SWITCH
31: ID/TSI PRIORITY
32: TONER COUNT CLEAR
33: PARALLEL PICK UP
OT8
LOCATION PROGRAM
OT
(Fig. 4-3-14)
(Fig. 4-3-15)
ONETOUCH KEY PRG.
AUTO DIAL KEY PRG.
A/D
3
(Fig. 4-3-5)
SYSTEM RESET
#
1: ALL DATA CLR
(Fig. 4-3-16)
GROUP SETTING
2: LOCATION DATA CLR
3: CONFIG. DATA CLR
4
5
(Fig. 4-3-6)
(Fig. 4-3-2)
DEFAULT TYPE SET
1
2
PC-LOADING
Fig. 4-1-1/2 General Key Operation
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
2
FUNCTION
OT9
USER PROGRAMMING
1
(Fig. 4-3-17)
(Fig. 4-3-18)
FUNC. PROGRAMMING
01: MCF (SINGLE-LOC.)
02: MCF (MULTI-LOC.)
03: ERR.REPORT (MCF.)
04: IMAGE IN MCF.
05: SENDER ID
06: MONITOR VOLUME
07: BUZZER VOLUME
08: CLOSED NETWORK
09: TX MODE DEFAULT
10: T/F TIMER PRG.
11: RING RESPONSE
12: DISTINCTIVE RING
13: 1’ST PAPER SIZE
14: USER LANGUAGE
15: INCOMING RING
16: REMOTE RECEIVE
17: MEM./FEEDER SW
18: POWER SAVE MODE
19: ECM FUNCTION
20: REMOTE DIAGNOSIS
21: PC/FAX SWITCH
22: NO TONER MEM RX
23: MEM FULL SAVE
24: CONTINUOUS TONE
25: INSTANT DIALING
26: RESTRICT ACCESS
27: WIDTH REDUCTION
28: ONE TOUCH PARAM.
2
(Fig. 4-3-19)
DIAL PARAMETER
REDIAL TRIES
REDIAL INTERVAL
DIAL TONE DETECT
BUSY TONE DETECT
MF (TONE)/DP (PULSE)
PULSE DIAL RATE
PULSE MAKE RATIO
PULSE DIAL TYPE
MF (TONE) DURATION
PBX LINE
FLASH/EARTH/NORMAL
AUTO START
DIAL PREFIX
3
4
(Fig. 4-3-20)
(Fig. 4-3-21)
CLOCK ADJUSTMENT
SYSTEM DATA PRG.
TSI/CSI
SENDER ID
CALL BACK NO.
5
6
7
8
PERSONAL BOX PRG.
(Fig. 4-3-22)
(Fig. 4-3-23)
(Fig. 4-3-24)
MEM. PASSWORD PRG.
FAX NETWORK PRG. (See Appendix B)
FAX2NET SERVICE
WEB RETRIEVAL
PAYMENT CARD REG.
9
RESTRICT ID PRG. (Only RESTRICT ACCESS=ON) (Fig. 4-3-24)
OT: One touch key
A/D: Auto dial
OT10
(Fig. 4-3-25)
loc: Location
PRINTER CLEANING
Fig. 4-1-2/2 General Key Operation
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
XX:XX XXX
(STANDBY CONDITION)
(• LOAD DOCUMENT(S), SELECT RESOLUTION MODE)
AUTO
DIALING?
YES
NO
Manual TX
WHICH
MODE?
ONE-TOUCH
TWO-DIGIT AUTO DIAL CODE
• PRESS "AUTO DIAL" KEY
• SET THE CODE (e.g. 01)
• ONE-TOUCH KEY
(e.g. No. 1)
OKI TAKASAKI
0273 56 7890
OKI TAKASAKI
DIALING
34542111
DIALING
CED
RECEIVED?
NO
YES
34542111
CALLING
• PRESS
"START" KEY
DIS
RECEIVED?
NO
YES
1
Fig. 4-1-1-1/2 Typical Transmission
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
CSI
RECEIVED?
NO
YES
OKI TAKASAKI
SENDING /144
33454 2111
SENDING /144
(¥ FAX MESSAGE TRANSMISSION STATUS)
MESSAGE
TRANSMISSION
COMPLETED?
NO
YES
RECEIVED
DCN?
YES
NO
COMMUN. ERROR
LOCAL
PROBLEM
OCCURRED?
EXAMPLES
COVER OPEN
, or
NO
(¥ ABOUT 1 SEC)
DOC. JAMMED
RESULT = OK
, etc.
XX:XX XXX
(← STANDBY CONDITION)
Fig. 4-1-1-2/2 Typical Transmission (continued)
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
XX:XX XXX
(← STANDBY CONDITION)
MANUAL RECEIVE MODE
¥ OFF-HOOK AND CONVERSATION
¥ PRESS "START" KEY
AUTO
RECEIVE MODE?
YES
NO
(¥ RINGING DETECTED)
AUTO REC. START
MANUAL RX START
YES
PERSONAL ID
RECEIVED?
NO
TSI
RECEIVED?
NO
OKI TAKASAKI
RECEIVING /144
YES
RECEIVING /144
33454 2111
RECEIVING /144
(¥ FAX MESSAGE RECEPTION STATUS)
MESSAGE
RECEPTION
COMPLETED?
NO
YES
RECEIVED
DCN?
NO
YES
COMMUN. ERROR
LOCAL
PROBLEM
OCCURRED?
YES
EXAMPLES
NO
COVER OPEN
(¥ ABOUT 1 SEC)
RESULT = OK
XX:XX XXX
(← STANDBY CONDITION)
Fig. 4-1-2 Typical Reception
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
POWER ON
Initial system reset condition when
power is turned ON.
NO
YES
Powered on while
holding down
COPY key.
Powered on while
holding
NO
FUNCTION key
down
YES
Go to Technical Programming
(Fig. 4-3-2)
or
Go to Fig. 4-3-18.
* Standby mode.
* Note: T/F, FAX etc., are the last setting before power is turned OFF.
Fig. 4-2-1 Power on Operation
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fig. 4-2-2-1/2 FX-051 Mechanical Control Sequence (Single Page)
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fig. 4-2-2-2/2 FX-051 Mechanical Control Sequence (Multi Page)
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting table of S-motor current value
Mode
Intial start
Restart
Prefeed
Pulse speed
Current value
600 PPS
428 mA
-----
-----
STD
(3.85)
Pulse speed
Current value
800 PPS
300 mA
800 PPS
428 mA
FINE
(7.7)
Pulse speed
Current value
800PPS
300 mA
800PPS
268 mA
EX. FINE
(15.4)
Pulse speed
Current value
400 PPS
268 mA
400 PPS
268 mA
Holding
Current value
184 mA
-----
* This table shows the values set provisionally.
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DEPARTMENT No. registration
ID NG
14:14 FAX
ENTER ID → [XXXX]
POWER ON
Document on hopper
ID OK
(DOC. OFF/ON)
FUNCTION key.
14:14 FAX
07/01/1998 14:14 FAX
SELECT LOCATION(S)
DEPARTMENT No.
no registration
FUNCTION key.
SELECT FUNCTION (OT)
MEMORY AVAIL.= 100%
COPY key x 2
TECH. PROGRAMMING
Power on while holding
COPY key down
Go to Technical Programming.
(Fig. 4-3-2)
YES(← /1-5)
NO(→ )
OT1
OT2
OT3
OT4
OT5
DELAYED TX
[07/01]YES(← ) NO(→ )
Go to Delayed TX Programming.
(Fig. 4-3-7)˚
Memory reception
(In case of no Toner/
No paper/Memory
only reception)
PRINT MEMORY MSG.?
YES(← )
Go to Print Memory Message/Print
NO(→ )
Confirmation RX Message.
(Fig. 4-3-8)
NO.=<MAIL BOX NO.>
Go to Confidential TX Programming.
(Fig. 4-3-9)
RELAY PASSWORD[_
ENTER 4DIGITS
]
Go to Relay Broadcast Initiate.
(Fig. 4-3-10)
BULLETIN POLL ?
YES(← )
Go to Polling TX/RX Programming.
(Fig. 4-3-11)
NO(→ )
OT6
OT7
OT8
1:ACTIVITY REPORT
Go to Selection of Reports.
(Fig. 4-3-12)
YES(← )
NO(→ /1-6)
DRUM COUNT
Go to Selection of Counters.
(Fig. 4-3-13)
CLEAR(← )
NEXT(→ )
LOCATION PROGRAMMING
ENTER(SRCH,OT,A/D,#)
Go to Location Programming.
(Fig. 4-3-14)
Power on while holding
FUNCTION key down
OT9
1:FUNC. PROGRAMMING
Go to Function Setting for User.
(Fig. 4-3-17)
YES(← )
NO(→ /1-7)
OT10
PRINTER CLEANING
YES(← ) NO(→ )
Go to Printer Cleaning Operation.
(Fig. 4-3-27)
Note: OT2, OT6, 7, 8, 9, 10 are invalid during PC printing.
Fig. 4-3-1 One Touch Key Operation
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TECH. PROGRAMMING
YES(← /1-5)
NO(→ )
← key
→ key
14:14 FAX
1
1
2
3
1:LOCAL TEST
YES(← ) NO(→ /1-5)
← key
→ key
1-5
2
Go to Fig. 4-3-3.
(Local test for
maintenance)
2:TECHNICAL FUNCTION
YES(← )
NO(→ /1-5)
← key
→ key
1-5
3
Go to Fig. 4-3-4.
(Serviceman setting)
3:SYSTEM RESET
YES(← ) NO(→ /1-5)
← key
→ key
1-5
4
Go to Fig. 4-3-5.
(System clear
programming)
4
4:DEFAULT TYPE SET
YES(← )
NO(→ /1-5)
← key
→ key
1-5
5
Go to Fig. 4-3-6.
(Selection of default table)
5
5:PC-LOADING
YES(← ) NO(→ /1-5)
Machine state NG*
← key → key
1-5
ARE YOU SURE ?
YES(← ) NO(→ )
Machine state NG*
→ key
← key
MACHINE BUSY
PC-LOADING
Initial process execution
Without received
data for 1 minute
3 sec.
Data reception
14:14 FAX
14:14 FAX
PC Loading
Go (Return) to standby state
*: Memory data, Redial waiting, Transmit Preparation, Machine alarm, and OFF HOOK
bypass the operation as geared by dash lines and return to the standby state.
Fig. 4-3-2 Technical Programming
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
From Fig. 4-3-2
1:LOCAL TEST
YES(← )
NO(→ /1-5)
→ key or 1-5
Go to sensor calibration. (Fig. 4-3-3-2/2)
← key
1
← key
1:SELF DIAGNOSIS
YES(← ) NO(→ /1-8)
CPU
XXXX XXXX
PROG
1:SELF DIAGNOSIS
EXCUTING
(Display for 3 seconds)
No paper, Cover open
Paper jam, Printer alarm
When paper size
is set to OTHER.
No paper, cover open,
printer alarm
→ key
1-8
1:SELF DIAGNOSIS
PRINTING
2
CONFIRM PAPER SIZE
After 3 seconds elapsed
← key
← key
← key
← key
2:SENSOR CALIBRATION
Go to sensor calibration. (Fig. 4-3-3-2/2)
YES(← )
NO(→ /1-8)
→ key
1-8
3
Go to stand by.
3:LED TEST
3:LED TEST
TESTING
YES(← )
NO(→ /1-8)
Press STOP key.
→ key
1-8
4
4:TONE SEND TEST
YES(← ) NO(→ /1-8)
Go to Tone send test.
(Fig. 4-3-3)
→ key
1-8
5
14.4K
12.0K
9.6KT
7.2KT
9.6K
5:MODEM SEND TEST
YES(← ) NO(→ /1-8)
MODEM RATE
[14.4K] YES(← ) NO(→ )
7.2K
→ key
4.8K
→ key
1-8
← key
2.4K
0.3K
5:MODEM SEND TEST
TX/14.4K/00’00"
Press STOP key.
5
6
14.4K
12.0K
9.6KT
7.2KT
9.6K
← key
6:MODEM RECEIVE TEST
YES(← ) NO(→ /1-8)
MODEM RATE
[14.4K] YES(← ) NO(→ )
7.2K
→ key
→ key
1-8
← key
4.8K
2.4K
6:MODEM RECEIVE TEST
RX/14.4K/00’00"/0000
Press STOP key.
Press STOP key.
6
7
← key
7:MF(TONE) SEND TEST
YES(← ) NO(→ /1-8)
PRESS 1-#
→ key
1-8
8
← key
8:TONE(TEL/FAX) TEST
YES(← ) NO(→ /1-8)
8:TONE(TEL/FAX) TEST
TONE SENDING
Press STOP key.
→ key
Fig. 4-3-3-1/3 Local Test
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1:SELF DIAGNOSIS
YES(← ) NO(→ /1-8)
1, 3-8
←
2
Go to Fig. 4-3-3-1/3.
→
2:SENSOR CALIBRATION
YES(← )
NO(→ /1-8)
→
key or 1-8
←
key
(Go to Fig. 4-3-3-1/3)
Alarm
No prefeed
Alarm standby
2:SENSOR CALIBRATION
PLEASE SET DOCUMENT
Paper prefeed was finished.
Set white document.
Press STOP key
No paper (during prefeed)
Alarm (during prefeed)
Paper prefeed was finished.
Alarm standby
Go to standby
2:SENSOR CALIBRATION
CALIBRATING
OK
NG & Press STOP key
RESULT=OK
SCANNING ERROR
After 3 seconds
After 3 seconds
DOCUMENT REMOVAL
End of document feed.
Fig. 4-3-3-2/3 Local Test (Sensor calibration)
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4:TONE SEND TEST
YES(← ) NO(→ /1-8)
←
key
←
key or 1-8
Go to Fig. 4-3-3-1/3.
5 second indications
4:TONE SEND TEST
2100HZ
SENDING
Press START key (Within 5 seconds)
30 second indications *1)
Press STOP key
4:TONE SEND TEST
2100HZ SENDING
Press STOP key
After 5 seconds elapsed
5 second indications
SENDING
After 30 seconds elapsed
4:TONE SEND TEST
1100HZ
Press START key (Within 5 seconds)
Indicated during 30 seconds *1)
Press STOP key
4:TONE SEND TEST
1100HZ SENDING
Press STOP key
After 30 seconds elapsed
After 5 seconds elapsed
*1) The LCD indication is further displayed more 30 seconds
by pressing the START key.
Fig. 4-3-3-3/3 Tone Send Test
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
From Fig. 4-3-2 Technical Programming
2:TECHNICAL FUNCTION
1
YES(← )
NO(→ /1-5)
→
key or 1-5
←
key
Go to Fig. 4-3-2.
FUNCTION NO. [_]
ENTER 01-33
01
01:SERVICE BIT
[ OFF ]YES(← ) NO(→ )
ON
OFF
→
key
02
←
key
02:MONITOR CONT.
[ OFF ]YES(← ) NO(→ )
ON
OFF
→
key
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
←
key
03:COUNTRY CODE
[ GER ]YES(← ) NO(→ )
USA, INT, GBR, IRL, NOR, SWE, FIN, DEN, GER, HUN, TCH, POL, SUI,
AUT, BEL, HOL, FRE, POR, ESP, ITA, GRE, AUS, NZL, SIN, HNG, LTA, MEX
→
key
←
key
04:TIME/DATE PRINT
[ ALL ]YES(← ) NO(→ )
OFF
ONCE
ALL
→
key
←
key
05:TSI PRINT
ON
OFF
[ ON
]YES(← ) NO(→ )
→
key
←
key
06:TAD MODE
[TYPE1]YES(← ) NO(→ )
OFF
TYPE1
TYPE2
TYPE3
→
key
←
key
07:REAL TIME DIAL
[TYPE2]YES(← ) NO(→ )
OFF
TYPE1
TYPE2
→
key
←
key
08:TEL/FAX SWITCH
[ ON ]YES(← )
ON
OFF
NO(→ )
→
key
←
key
09:MDY/DMY
[ DMY ]YES(← ) NO(→ )
MDY
DMY
→
key
←
key
A
Fig. 4-3-4-1/3 Technical Function Programming
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A
10
11
10:LONG DOC. SCAN
ON
OFF
[ ON
]YES(← ) NO(→ )
← key
→ key
11:TONE FOR ECHO
[ OFF ]YES(← ) NO(→ )
ON
OFF
12
13
14
15
← key
→ key
12:MH ONLY
[ OFF ]YES(← ) NO(→ )
ON
OFF
← key
→ key
13:H/MODEM RATE
[14.4K]YES(← ) NO(→ )
4.8K
9.6K
14.4K
← key
→ key
14:T1(TX)TIMER VALUE
[ 060 ]YES(← ) NO(→ )
14:T1(TX)TIMER VALUE
← key
→ key
[_
]ENTER 010-255
060
15:T1(RX)TIMER VALUE
[ 035 ]YES(← ) NO(→ )
15:T1(RX)TIMER VALUE
16
← key
→ key
[_
]ENTER 010-255
035
16:T2 TIMER *100MS
[ 060 ]YES(← ) NO(→ )
16:T2 TIMER *100MS
17
19
← key
→ key
[_
]ENTER 001-255
060
17:DIS BIT32
[ ON ]YES(← ) NO(→ )
ON
OFF
→ key
← key
18:ERR. CRITERION
[ 10 ]YES(← ) NO(→ )
18:ERR. CRITERION
19
20
→ key
← key
[_
]ENTER 00-99
10
19:OFF HOOK BYPASS
[ OFF ]YES(← ) NO(→ )
ON
OFF
← key → key
20:NL EQUALIZER
0KM
[ 0KM]YES(← )
NO(→ )
1.8KM
3.6KM
7.2KM
← key
→ key
B
Go to next page.
Fig. 4-3-4-2/3 Technical Function Programming
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B
21
22
21:ATTENUATOR
[ 9 DB]YES(← ) NO(→ )
0DB~15DB
0DB~15DB
0DB~15DB
→
key
←
key
22:T/F TONE ATT.
[ 9 DB]YES(← ) NO(→ )
23
24
25
→
key
←
key
23:MF ATT.
[ 6 DB]YES(← ) NO(→ )
←
key
key
→
24:RING DURA. * 10MS
[ 14 ]YES(← ) NO(→ )
24:RING DURA. * 10MS
[_
←
key
key
→
] ENTER 10-99
14
25:CML TIMING *100MS
[ 03 ]YES(← ) NO(→ )
25:CML TIMING *100MS
26
←
key
key
→
[_
] ENTER 01-19
03
26:LED HEAD STROBE
[01101]YES(← ) NO(→ )
26:LED HEAD STROBE
27
28
29
←
key
key
→
[_
]ENTER 0/1
01101
27:LED HEAD WIDTH
[TYPE1]YES(← ) NO(→ )
TYPE1
TYPE2
←
key
→
key
28:MEDIA TYPE
H
[
M
]YES(← ) NO(→ )
MH
M
←
key
→
key
key
-2
-1
0
+1
+2
29:TR LATCH CURRENT
[
+1]YES(← ) NO(→ )
←
key
→
30
31
30:NSF SWITCH
[ ON ]YES(← ) NO(→ )
ON
OFF
←
key
→
key
31:ID/TSI PRIORITY
[ ID ]YES(← ) NO(→ )
ID
TSI
32
33
←
key
→
key
32:TONER COUNT CLEAR
[OFF]YES(← ) NO(→ )
ON
OFF
←
key
→
key
33:PARALLEL PICK UP
[ ON ]YES(← ) NO(→ )
Note: Operator cannot use numeric key to
move next setting or jump other setting
at the each setting.
ON
OFF
←
key
→
key
1
Fig. 4-3-4-3/3 Technical Function Programming
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3:SYSTEM RESET
YES(← )
NO(→ /1-5)
Go to Fig. 4-3-2.
← key
1
1:ALL DATA CLR
YES(← )
NO(→ /1-3)
1-3
← key
→ key
2
2:LOCATION DATA CLR
YES(← )
NO(→ /1-3)
1-3
← key
→ key
3
3:CONFIG. DATA CLR
YES(← )
NO(→ /1-3)
1-3
→ key
← key
ARE YOU SURE ?
YES(← ) NO(→ )
→ key
← key
Start of data clear
CLEAR
End of programming + 1 second
(Flash memory writing)
Fig. 4-3-5 System Reset
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4:DEFAULT TYPE SET
YES(← ) NO(→ /1-5)
→
key or 1-5
←
key
Go to Fig. 4-3-2.
(Technical Programming)
DEFAULT TYPE SET
[ 1]YES(← ) NO(→ )
1~20
←
key
→
key
Change of default type
PROGRAMMING
Change of version (default type)
End of programming + 1 second
(Flash memory writing)
Note: Even if serviceman makes all data clear by using system reset,
the default type is not changed.
Fig. 4-3-6 Default Type Setting
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SELECT FUNCTION (OT)
MEMORY AVAIL.= 100%
Press OT1 key.
←
key
DELAYED TX DATE
[07/01]YES(← ) NO(→ )
→
key
DELAYED TX DATE
[_ / ]PRG. DATE 0-9
0, 7
DELAYED TX DATE
[07/_ ]PRG. DATE 0-9
0, 2
DELAYED TX DATE
[07/02]YES(← ) NO(→ )
→
key
←
key
DELAYED TX TIME
[_ : ]PRG. TIME 0-9
1
DELAYED TX TIME
[1_: ]PRG. TIME 0-9
2
DELAYED TX TIME
[12:_ ]PRG. TIME 0-9
3
DELAYED TX TIME
[12:3_]PRG. TIME 0-9
4
DELAYED TX TIME
[12:34]YES(← ) NO(→ )
→
key
←
key
SELECT LOCATION(S)
Select location.
Go to Calling operation
(Fig. 4-4-6)
Fig. 4-3-7 Delayed TX
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SELECT FUNCTION [OT]
MEMORY AVAIL.= 100%
<PERSONAL Box No.>
0: Bulletin POLL
No data in memory
1~8: Mail Box Bulletin POLL (Bulletin board)
Opeation can select No. 0 ~ 8 for Box No. even
DIS BIT32 set to OFF.
PRESS OT2 Key
PRINT PERSONAL BOX?
YES(
←
)
NO(
→ )
←
key
→
key
1
NO DATA IN MEMORY
PERSONAL BOX NO. [ ]
ENTER 0-8
SELECT FUNCTION [OT]
MEMORY AVAIL.= 100%
Enter 1
1
PERSONAL BOX NO. [1]
YES(
←
)
NO(
→
)
→
key
←
key
Data in Memory (Bulletin)
No data in memory
Data in memory (Confidential)
PRG. PASSWARD [_
ENTER 4DIGITS
]
1234
PRG. PASSWORD [1234]
YES( NO(
←
)
→
)
NO DATA IN MEMORY
→
key
←
key
After 3 seconds
elapsed
PASSWORD NG
PASSWORD ERROR
PASSWORD OK
After 3 seconds elapsed
No paper or cover open
When the paper size is set to OTHER.
PERSONAL BOX NO. = 1
PRINTING
Press STOP key.
End of feed
STOPPED
CONFIRM PAPER SIZE
End of feed
After 3 seconds elapsed
CANCEL ?
YES(
←
)
NO(
→
→
)
key
←
key
(cancel)
MEMORY CANCELED
After 3 seconds elapsed
Go to standby mode.
Fig. 4-3-8-1/2 Personal Box Print Out
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SELECT FUNCTION (OT)
MEMORY AVAIL.=50%
Press OT2 key
No memory reception & Personal Box (data in memory)
NO DATA IN MEMORY
3 sec
Memory reception
(In case of No Toner/
No paper/Memory only
reception)
No memory reception & Personal Box (data in memory)
PRINT MEMORY MSG. ?
YES(← ) NO(→ )
PRINT Personal BOX ?
YES(← ) NO(→ )
→ key
← key
Password No. no registration
Go to Personal Box Print Out
(Fig. 4-3-8-1/2)
Password No. registration
PRG. PASSWORD [_
]
YES(← )
NO(→ )
1234
PRG. PASSWORD [1234]
YES(← ) NO(→ )
→ key
← key
PASSWORD NG
PASSWORD ERROR
After 3 seconds elapsed
No paper or Cover open
When paper size is
set to other.
MESSAGE IN MEMORY
PRINTING
End of feed
Press STOP key
STOPPED
End of feed
CONFIRM PAPER SIZE
CANCEL ?
YES(← )
NO(→ )
→ key
After 3 seconds elapsed
← key
(Memory canceled)
MEMORY CANCELED
After 3 seconds elapsed
Go to standby mode.
Fig. 4-3-8-2/2 Memory Message Print Out
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14:14 FAX
Press FUNCTION key.
SELECT FUNCTION (OT)
MEMORY AVAIL.=100%
Press OT3 key.
NFS SWITCH=OFF
DIS BIT32=ON
FUNC.NOT AVAILABLE
NO.=< MAIL BOX NO. >
After 3 sec.
3 sec
NO.=_
MAX 20 DIGITS
(0~9, space, *, #)
Press START key.
SELECT LOCATION
Select location
*1) Starting the memory reading upon call origination
when INSTANT DIALING=ON.
OKI TOKYO
YES(START)
NO(LOC.)
Set to Feeder Transmission when image memory
is running out or memory transaction is full.
INSTANT DIALING=OFF &
MEM./FEEDER SW=MEM
Press
START key.
INSTANT DIALING=OFF & MEM./FEEDER SW=FEEDER
No document
LOC.
Cover open
LOAD DOCUMENT
07/01/1998 14:14 FAX
COVER OPEN
OKI TOKYO
*1)
DIALING
Communication
After 3 seconds elapsed
Go to standby.
Cover open
No document
End of
scanning
07/01/1998 1414 FAX
COVER OPEN
LOAD DOCUMENT
MEMORY AVAIL.=100%
SCANNING
01
After 3 seconds elapsed
Memory over flow
Press STOP key.
Go to standby.
MEMORY OVERFLOW
STOPPED
After 5 seconds elapsed
*2)
After 3 seconds elapsed
Shifting automatically to the following
processing according to MEM FULL SAVE
setting after 59 seconds timeout.
SEND SCANED PEGES?
YES(← )
07/01/1998 14:14 FAX
RELOAD DOCUMENT
*2)
NO(→ )
→ key
← key
MEMORY OVERFLOW:FAX
REFER TO USER GUIDE
Fig. 4-3-9 Confidential TX Programming
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SELECT FUNCTION (OT)
MEMORY AVAIL.= 100%
NSF SWITCH = OFF
Press OT4.
Previous data of
password, if
assigned, is
shown.
No password
FUNC.NOT AVAIRAVLE
RELAY PASSWORD[0000]
YES(← ) NO(→ )
3 sec
← key
→ key
RELAY PASSWORD[_
]
]
ENTER 4DIGITS
1
RELAY PASSWORD[1_
ENTER 4DIGITS
23
RELAY PASSWORD[123_]
ENTER 4DIGITS
4
Remote list
No. exists.
RELAY PASSWORD[1234]
YES(← )
NO(→ )
← key
→ key
Remote list No. is not assigned yet.
REMOTE LIST NO. [01]
← key
YES(← )
NO(→ )
→ key
Remote list No. is not assigned yet.
← key
REMOTE LIST NO. [_ ]
ENTER 01-99
Note: When auto dial code number 70 is not
assigned, relay broadcast report is not
transmitted.
12
REMOTE LIST NO. [12]
YES(← )
NO(→ )
When it is assigned, relay report is
transmitted to fax number assigned to
auto dial code 70.
← key
→ key
SELECT LOCATION
If assigned, the relay report is transmitted
to fax number programmed into auto dial
code 70.
Select loc.
OKI TOKYO
YES(START)
NO(LOC.)
INSTANT DIALING=OFF
Select loc.
& MEM./FEEDER SW=FEEDER
Press START key.
No document
Cover open
INSTANT DIALING=OFF
LOAD DOCUMENT
07/01/1996 14:14 FAX
COVER OPEN
& MEM./FEEDER SW=MEM.
B
After 3 seconds
A
OKI TOKYO
DIALING
Go to standby.
Fig. 4-3-10-1/2 Relay Broadcast Initiate
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A
Cover open
No document
LOAD DOCUMENT
End of scanning
MEMORY AVAIL.= 100%
07/01/1998 14:14 FAX
COVER OPEN
SCANNING
01
After 3 seconds elapsed
Memory over flow
Press STOP key.
Go to standby
STOPPED
MEMORY OVERFLOW
After 3 seconds
elapsed
After 5 seconds elapsed
*2
07/01/1998 14:14 FAX
RELOAD DOCUMENT
SEND SCANED PEGES?
YES(← )
NO(→ )
→ key
← key
MEMORY OVERFLOW:FAX
REFER TO USER GUIDE
B
*2)
Shifting automatically to the following processing according
to MEM FULL SAVE setting after 59 seconds timeout.
Fig. 4-3-10-2/2 Relay Broadcast Initiate
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
<PERSONAL BOX No.>
: Bulletin POLL
0
1~8 : Mail Box Bulletin POLL (Bulletin board)
Operator can select No. 0~8 for Box No., even
DIS BIT32 set to OFF.
SELECT FUNCTION (OT)
MEMORY AVAIL.= 100%
Press OT5 key.
No document
DIS BIT32=OFF
NO.=< MAIL BOX NO. >
Document
Press START key.
3 SEC
NO.=_
MAX 20 DIGITS
(0~9, spare, *, #)
Press START key.
0, 1
NO.=01_
When image memory is running
out or transaction is full.
Press START key.
When the machine is already
in the Bulletin POLL waiting state.
POLLING RX
SELECT LOCATION
BULLETIN POLL
YES(← ) NO(→ )
4
4
When image memory
DIS BIT32=OFF
→ key
← key
is running out or
transaction is full.
2
When the machine is already
in the Bulletin POLL waiting state.
PERSONAL BOX NO. [ ]
ENTER 0-8
MEMORY AVAIL.= 90%
SCANNING 01
MEMORY POLL
YES(← ) NO(→ )
After 3 seconds
Memory reading ended
2
1
Memory over flow
PERSONAL BOX NO. [2]
Feeder Polling TX
waiting state
YES(← )
NO(→ )
→ key
When is input 0 in the Box No.
and exists in the memory polling
TX waiting state.
← key
14:14 FAX
WAITING TO BE POLL
No document
When BOX No. is opened
as confidential.
When BOX No.
is not opened.
When BOX No. is
opened and the
image memory
is registered.
LOAD DOCUMENT
ILLEGAL OPERATION
PROGRAMMING
After 3 seconds
Go to standby
Flash memory
programming
After 3 seconds
After 3 seconds
3
1
3
Memory reading ended
MEMORY AVAIL.= 90%
SCANNING 01
OVER WRITE
YES(← )
NO(→ )
Memory over flow
MEMORY OVERFLOW
3
2
After 5 seconds elapsed
SEND SCANED PAGES?
*1) Shifting automatically to the following
processing according to MEM FULL SAVE
setting after 59 seconds timeout.
*1)
YES(← )
NO(→ )
← key
→ key
14:14 FAX
WAITING TO BE POLL
MEMORY OVERFLOW:FAX
REFER TO USER GUIDE
Fig. 4-3-11 Polling TX/RX Programming
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SELECT FUNCTION (OT)
MEMORY AVAIL.= 100%
Press OT6 key
Go to standby mode
After 3 seconds
CONFIRM PAPER SIZE
when the paper size is set to OTHER.
elapsed
1
End of feed
← key
1
1
2
1:ACTIVITY REPORT
ACTIVITY REPORT
PRINTING
2
YES(← )
NO(→ /1-6)
→ key
1-6
No paper or cover open
No data in memory
8
2
3
4
5
6
7
End of feed
← key
1
2:BROADCAST MCF.
BROADCAST MCF.
PRINTING
3
YES(← )
NO(→ /1-6)
→ key
1-6
No paper or cover open
No data in memory
8
End of feed
8
← key
1
3
4
3:ACTIVE MEM. FILES
ACTIVE MEM. FILES
PRINTING
4
YES(← )
NO(→ /1-6)
→ key
1-6
No paper or cover open
No data in memory
End of feed
← key
1
4:PHONE DIRECTORY
PHONE DIRECTORY
PRINTING
5
YES(← )
NO(→ /1-6)
→ key
1-6
No paper or cover open
8
End of feed
← key
1
5
6
5:CONFIGURATION
CONFIGURATION
PRINTING
6
YES(← )
NO(→ /1-6)
→ key
1-6
No paper or cover open
8
End of feed
← key
1
6:PROTOCOL DUMP
PROTOCOL DUMP
PRINTING
7
YES(← )
NO(→ /1-6)
→ key
No data in memory
1-6
No paper or cover open
8
NO DATA IN MEMORY
After 3 seconds elapsed
Go to standby mode
Go to standby mode
Fig. 4-3-12-1/2 Report Print (In case of Service bit = OFF)
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SELECT FUNCTION (OT)
MEMORY AVAIL.= 100%
Press OT6 key
Go to standby mode
After 3 seconds
CONFIRM PAPER SIZE
when the paper size is set to OTHER.
elapsed
1
End of feed
← key
1
1
1:ACTIVITY REPORT
YES(← ) NO(→ /1-6)
ACTIVITY REPORT
PRINTING
2
→ key
1-6
No paper or cover open
No data in memory
9
2
3
4
5
6
7
End of feed
← key
1
2
3
2:BROADCAST MCF.
BROADCAST MCF.
3
YES(← )
NO(→ /1-6)
PRINTING
→ key
1-6
No paper or cover open
No data in memory
9
End of feed
← key
1
3:ACTIVE MEM. FILES
ACTIVE MEM. FILES
4
YES(← )
NO(→ /1-6)
PRINTING
→ key
1-6
No paper or cover open
No data in memory
9
End of feed
← key
1
4:PHONE DIRECTORY
YES(← ) NO(→ /1-6)
PHONE DIRECTORY
PRINTING
4
5
→ key
1-6
No paper or cover open
9
End of feed
← key
1
5:CONFIGURATION
CONFIGURATION
PRINTING
5
6
6
YES(← )
NO(→ /1-6)
→ key
1-6
No paper or cover open
9
End of feed
← key
6:PROTOCOL DUMP
YES(← ) NO(→ /1-6)
PROTOCOL DUMP
PRINTING
7
→ key
No paper or cover open
No data in memory
1-6
9
1
End of feed
← key
LOG. REPORT
LOG. REPORT
PRINTING
8
8
YES(← )
NO(→ /1-6)
→ key
1-6
1
No paper or cover open
NO DATA IN MEMORY
9
After 3 seconds elapsed
Go to standby mode
Go to standby mode
Fig. 4-3-12-2/2 Report Print (In case of Service bit = ON)
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14:14 FAX
Press FUNCTION key.
SELECT FUNCTION (OT)
MEMORY AVAIL.= 100%
Press OT7 key.
Drum reaches
its lite span.
No. of counter (pages) will not appear for user.
DRUM COUNT
CLEAR(← )
NEXT(→ )
→ key
← key
TONER COUNT
CLEAR(← )
NEXT(→ )
← key
→ key
PRINT COUNT
XXXXXX
NEXT(→ )
→ key
SCAN
COUNT
XXXXXX
NEXT(→ )
No. of print counter and scan counter (pages)
will appear but cannot be cleared by user.
→ key
ARE YOU SURE ?
CLEAR(← ) NEXT(→ )
→ key
← key
CLEAR
End of programming + 1 second
(Flash memory writing)
Clear Operation:
User can clear only DRUM counter.
When the drum has reached its life span, LCD shows REPLACE I/D
UNIT. After having cleared the drum counter, warning message will be
disappeared.
Fig. 4-3-13-1/3 Counter Display/Clear (In case of Service bit = OFF&TOWER COUNT CLEAR=ON)
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14:14 FAX
FUNCTION key.
SELECT FUNCTION (OT)
MEMORY AVAIL.= 100%
OT7
DRUM COUNT
CLEAR(← )
NEXT(→ )
→ key
← key
PRINT COUNT
XXXXXX
NEXT(→ )
→ key
ARE YOU SURE ?
YES(← ) NO(→ )
SCAN
COUNT
XXXXXX
NEXT(→ )
→ key
→ key
← key
CLEAR
End of programming + 1 second
(Flash memory writing)
Fig. 4-3-13-2/3 Counter Display/Clear (In case of service bit = OFF and Toner Counter Clear = OFF)
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14:14 FAX
Press FUNCTION key.
SELECT FUNCTION (OT)
MEMORY AVAIL.= 100%
Press OT7 key.
DRUM
COUNT
XXXXXX
CLEAR(← )
NEXT(→ )
← key
→ key
TONER
COUNT XXXXXX
CLEAR(← )
NEXT(→ )
← key
→ key
DRUM(T)COUNT XXXXXX
DRUM (T) will be used to know the total in-use
life of the machine.
CLEAR(← )
NEXT(→ )
← key
→ key
PRINT
COUNT XXXXXX
CLEAR(← )
NEXT(→ )
← key
→ key
SCAN
COUNT
XXXXXX
CLEAR(← )
NEXT(→ )
← key
→ key
ARE YOU SURE ?
YES(← ) NO(→ )
← key
→ key
CLEAR
End of programming + 1 second
(Flash memory writing)
Fig. 4-3-13-3/3 Counter Display/Clear (In case of Service bit = ON)
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SELECT FUNCTION (OT)
MEMORY AVAIL.= 100%
Press A/D key.
Press # key.
Go to Fig. 4-3-15.
Go to Fig. 4-3-16.
Go to Fig. 4-4-21.
OT8
LOCATION PROGRAMMING
ENTER(SRCH,OT,A/D,#)
Press SRCH key.
Select the location which was
already selected by TX preparation.
OT key
Registered
Press START key.
NO=<
FAX NO.
>
NO=03 3404 7123
ILLEGAL OPERATION
ID=< LOCATION ID. >
ID=NEWYORK OFFICE
After 3 seconds
02 . . . . 890
After 3 seconds
NO=_
ID=
NO=0273 56 7890_
ID=NEWYORK OFFICE
03 . . . . 123
Press START key.
NO=03 3404 7123_
ID=
NO=0273 56 7890
ID=NEWYORK OFFICE
NO=03 3404 7123
ID=NEWYORK OFFICE
Press START key.
6666
Press START key.
NO=03 3404 7123
ID=_
NO=0273 56 7890
ID=OEWYORK OFFICE
6
. . . . .
NO=03 3404 7123
ID=6
NO=0273 56 7890
ID=OKI TAKASAKI
66
Press START key.
Press START key.
NO=03 3404 7123
ID=N
NO=03 3404 7345
3
02 . . . . 456
NO=03 3404 7123
ID=N3
NO=0273 12 3456
. . . . .
Press START key.
NO=03 3404 7123
ID=NEWYORK OFFICE
Press START key.
NO=< OR LOCATION
>
After 3 seconds
NO=_
03 . . . . 345
NO=03 3404 7345_
Press START key.
Fig. 4-3-14 One Touch Programming
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SELECT FUNCTION (OT)
MEMORY AVAIL.= 100%
Press OT key.
Press # key.
OT8
Go to Fig. 4-3-14.
Go to Fig. 4-3-16.
Go to Fig. 4-4-21
LOCATION PROGRAMMING
ENTER(SRCH,OT,A/D,#)
Press SRCH key.
Press
A/D key.
*1)
Press STOP key.
AUTO DIAL NO. [_ ]
ENTER 01-70
0
AUTO DIAL NO. [0_]
ENTER 01-70
1
AUTO DIAL NO. [01]
ENTER 01-70
When the auto-dial code which
is assigned by TX preparation.
After 0.4 seconds
Registered
Press START key.
NO=<
FAX NO.
>
NO=03 3404 7123
ILLEGAL OPERATION
ID=< LOCATION ID. >
ID=NEWYORK OFFICE
After 3 seconds
02 . . . . 90
After 3 seconds
NO=_
ID=
NO=0273 56 7890_
ID=NEWYORK OFFICE
03 . . . . 12
Press START key.
NO=03 3404 7123_
ID=
NO=0273 56 7890
ID=NEWYORK OFFICE
NO=03 3404 7123
ID=NEWYORK OFFICE
Press START key.
6666
Press START key.
NO=03 3404 7123
ID=_
NO=0273 56 7890
ID=OEWYORK OFFICE
666
. . . . .
NO=03 3404 7123
ID=N
NO=0273 56 7890
ID=OKI TAKASAKI
. . . . .
Press START key.
NO=03 3404 7123
ID=NEWYORK OFFICE
Press START key.
Fig. 4-3-15 Auto-dial Programmiong
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fig. 4-3-16 Group Dial Programming
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press OT9 key.
1
2
3
key
key
1-9
1-9
key
key
Go to Function Programming.
(Fig. 4-3-18)
Go to Dial Parameter Programming.
(Fig. 4-3-19)
key
1-9
1-9
key
key
Go to Clock Adjustment..
(Fig. 4-3-20)
4
5
key
key
key
Go to System Data Programming.
(Fig. 4-3-21)
1-9
1-9
key
key
Go to Personal Box Programming.
(Fig. 4-3-22)
6
7
8
Go to Enter ID Programming.
(Fig. 4-3-23)
*1)
*1) No displayed when user's setting RESTRICT ACCESS is
set to OFF.
key
key
key
key
key
key
1-9
1-9
1-9
See Appendix B
See Appendix B
9
Go to Restrict ID Programming.
(Fig. 4-3-24)
Fig. 4-3-17 User Function Programming
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Function Programming
Go to Fig. 4-3-17
1:FUNC. PROGRAMMING
YES(
←
)
NO( /1-7)
→
1
→
key or 1-7
←
key
FUNCTION NO. [_ ]
ENTER 01-28
01
01:MCF(SINGLE-LOC.)
01:MCF(SINGLE-LOC.)
[ OFF ] YES(
←
) NO(
→
)
[ ON
] YES(
←
) NO(
→
)
←
key
→
key
→
key
←
key
02
02:MCF(MULTI-LOC.)
02:MCF(MULTI-LOC.)
[ OFF ] YES(
←
) NO(
→
)
[ ON
] YES(
←
) NO(
→
→
)
←
key
→
key
key
←
key
03
04
03:ERR.REPORT (MCF.)
[ ON ] YES(
←
)
NO(
→
)
ON OFF
←
key
→
key
04:IMAGE IN MCF.
[ ON ] YES(
←
)
NO(
→
→
)
ON OFF
ON OFF
OFF LOW
LOW MID
OFF T/R
←
key
05
06
key
05:SENDER ID
[ ON ] YES(
←
)
NO(
→
→
)
←
key
key
06:MONITOR VOLUME
[ OFF ] YES( ) NO(
←
→
→
)
HIGH
HIGH
RX
←
key
07
08
key
07:BUZZER VOLUME
[ OFF ] YES( ) NO(
←
→
→
)
←
key
key
08:CLOSED NETWORK
[ OFF ] YES( ) NO(
←
→
→
)
key
←
key
2
Go to next page.
Fig. 4-3-18-1/4 Function Programming
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Function Programming
2
09
→
→
→
LED
STD/NORMAL STD/DARK STD/LIGHT
09:TX MODE DEFAULT
→
→
→
YES(
←
)
NO(
→
→
)
FINE/NORMAL FINE/DARK FINE/LIGHT
→
→
→
EX.FINE/NORMAL EX.FINE/DARK EX.FINE/LIGHT
←
key
10
11
→
→
PHOTO/NORMAL PHOTO/DARK PHOTO/LIGHT
key
10:T/F TIMER PRG.
[20SEC] YES( ) NO(
←
→
→
)
20 SEC
35 SEC
5 SEC
←
key
key
*2
11:RING RESPONSE
[1RING] YES( ) NO(
1 RING
10 SEC
15 SEC
20 SEC
←
→
)
←
key
12
Machine may bybass the sellection of
ring response or distinctive ring in
some countries.
*2:
12:DISTINCTIVE RING
OFF
ON
[ OFF ] YES(
←
) NO(
→
)
SET
→
key
SET &
←
key
SETUP FAX RING
CALL FAX NUMBER NOW
NO RI for 90 sec.
RI receiving
AUTO DETECTING
RING PATTERN
Certification NG
for 90 sec.
Certification OK
DISTINCTIVE RING SET
RESULT=NG
DISTINCTIVE RING SET
RESULT=OK
3 sec. passed
3 sec. passed
12:DISTINCTIVE RING
12:DISTINCTIVE RING
[ SET ] YES(
←
) NO(
→
)
[ ON ] YES(
←
)
NO(
→
)
←
key
←
key
13
14
13:1’ST PAPER SIZE
*3
OTHER
[ A4
] YES(
←
) NO(
→
)
A4
LET.
LGL13
LGL14
←
key
→
key
*3: This message appears when
operating with MFP terminal.
14:USER
[ ENG.] YES(
LANGUAGE
) NO(
2 kinds of languages are provided for selection.
←
→
→
)
←
key
15
16
key
Instead of ringer circuit, software can control
built-in speaker for ringing sound.
Off position will be available for no-ringing
reception as well.
15:INCOMING RING
[ ON ] YES( ) NO(
←
→
→
)
ON
OFF
DRC
22
←
key
key
16:REMOTE RECEIVE
[ OFF ] YES( ) NO(
←
→
→
)
OFF
00
11
33
44
55
66
77
88
99
##
**
←
key
key
2 digits (same number) will be required for
remote reception.
3
Go to next page.
Fig. 4-3-18-2/4 Function Programming
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Function Programming
3
17
17:MEM./FEEDER SW.
[ MEM ] YES( ) NO(
MEM.
FEED.
←
→
→
)
←
key
18
key
18:POWER SAVE MODE
[ ON ] YES( ) NO(
ON
OFF
←
→
→
)
←
key
19
20
key
19:ECM FUNCTION
[ ON ] YES( ) NO(
ON
OFF
←
→
→
)
←
key
key
20:REMOTE DIAGNOSIS
ON
OFF
[ OFF ] YES(
←
) NO(
→
)
←
key
21
22
→
key
21:PC/FAX SWITCH
[ ON ] YES( ) NO(
ON
OFF
←
→
→
)
←
key
key
22:NO TONER MEM. RX
ON
OFF
[ OFF ] YES(
←
) NO(
→
)
23
24
←
key
→
key
23:MEM FULL SAVE
[ OFF ] YES( ) NO(
ON
OFF
←
→
→
)
←
key
key
24:CONTINUOUS TONE
[ OFF ] YES( ) NO(
ON
OFF
←
→
→
)
←
key
key
4
Go to next page
Fig. 4-3-18-3/4 Function Programming
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Function Programming
4
25
25:INSTANT DIALING
[ ON ] YES( ) NO(
ON
OFF
←
→
→
)
←
key
key
26
26:RESTRICT ACCESS
ON
OFF
[OFF] YES(
←
) NO(
→ )
←
key
→
→
key
key
)
27
28
27:WIDTH REDUCTION
ON
OFF
[OFF] YES(
←
) NO(
→ )
←
key
OT key
ECHO PROTECTION
[ OFF ] YES( ) NO(
28:ONE TOUCH PARAM.
YES(OT) NO(
OFF
ON
←
→ )
→
←
key
→
key
→
key
FAX SPEED
[14.4K] YES( ) NO(
1
4.8K
9.6K
14.4K
←
→ )
→
key
←
key
Note)
The machine makes the numeric key setting other than 01 to 26 invalid.
In each of setting status indication, the machine does not allow the shift
to the next setting by pressing numeric keys.
Fig. 4-3-18-4/4 Function Programming
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1:FUNC. PROGRAMMING
YES( NO( /1-7)
←
)
→
1
2
2:DIAL PARAMETER
YES(
←
)
NO( /1-7)
→
→
key or 1-7
←
key
Go to Fig. 4-3-17.
REDIAL TRIES
[ 5TRY] YES(
←
) NO(
→
→
)
0 TRY
1 MIN
1 TRY
10 TRY
1 TRY
2 TRY
5 TRY
key
←
key
(COUNTRY CODE = FRE)
REDIAL INTERVAL
[1MIN] YES(
←
) NO(
→
)
2 MIN
3 MIN
6 MIN
1 MIN
2 MIN
12 MIN
→
key
←
key
(COUNTRY CODE = FRE)
DIAL TONE DETECT
[ OFF ] YES( ) NO(
←
→
→
)
OFF
OFF
DP
ON
key
←
key
BUSY TONE DETECT
[ OFF ] YES( ) NO(
←
→
→
)
ON
MF
key
←
key
MF(TONE)/DP(PULSE)
[ DP
] YES(
←
) NO(
→
)
→
key
←
key
PULSE DIAL RATE
[10PPS] YES( ) NO(
←
→
→
)
10PPS
16PPS
20PPS
key
←
key
PULSE MAKE RATIO
[ 33% ] YES( ) NO(
←
→
→
)
33%
39%
key
←
key
2
Go to next page
Fig. 4-3-19-1/4 Dial Parameters
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2
PULSE DIAL TYPE
[
N
] YES(
←
) NO(
→
→
)
N
10-N
N+1
key
←
key
MF(TONE) DURATION
[ 75MS] YES(
←
) NO(
→
)
75MS
OFF
N
85MS
100MS
→
key
←
key
PBX LINE
[ OFF ] YES(
←
) NO(
→
→
)
ON
key
←
key
FLASH/EARTH/NORMAL
[
N
] YES(
←
) NO(
→
)
N: normal
F: flash
E: earth
F
E
→
key
←
key
AUTO START
[ OFF ] YES( ) NO(
←
→
→
)
OFF
ON
key
←
key
Registrated access digits
DIAL PREFIX
DIAL PREFIX
[1234 ] YES( ) NO(
[ OFF ] YES(
←
) NO(
→
)
←
→ )
←
key
→
key
←
key
→
key
DIAL PREFIX
[_
]ENTER 4DIGITS
Press
SPACE key
four times.
Enter
1234.
1
Fig. 4-3-19-2/4 Dial Parameters
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fig. 4-3-19-3/4 Dial Parameters (1)
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fig. 4-3-19-4/4 Dial Parameters (2)
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1:FUNC. PROGRAMMING
YES( NO( /1-7)
←
)
→
3
3:CLOCK ADJUSTMENT
YES(
←
)
NO(
→
/1-7)
→
key or 1-7
←
key
Go to Fig. 4-3-17
[07/01/1998 12:23]
YES( NO( /0-9)
←
)
→
Enter time and date by using
→
key and 0-9 keys.
→
key or 0-9
←
key
Fig. 4-3-20 Clock Adjustment
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1:FUNC. PROGRAMMING
YES( NO( /1-7)
←
)
→
→
key or 1-7
4
Go to Fig. 4-3-17.
Go to Fig. 4-3-17.
4:SYSTEM DATA PRG.
YES(
←
)
NO(
→
/1-7)
→
key or 1-7
←
key
*2) Registered
Press
START key.
NO=<
ID=<
TSI/CSI
SENDER ID. >
>
NO=03 3404 7123
ID=OKI TOKYO
After 3 seconds
Press 0273 ....
SPACE .. 890 keys.
NO=_
ID=
NO=0273 56 7890_
ID=OKI TOKYO
Press 03.
Press START key.
SPACE ..123 keys.
Press
START key.
NO=03 3404 7123_
ID=
NO=0273 56 7890
ID=OKI TOKYO
Press START key.
666655......
NO=03 3404 7123
ID=_
NO=0273 56 7890
ID=OKI TAKASAKI_
666655......
Press START key.
Press
START key.
NO=03 3404 7123
ID=OKI TOKYO_
1NO=03 3404 7765
Press START key.
Press 0273 ....
SPACE .. 456 keys.
1 NO=<CALL BACK NO.>
1NO=0273 12 3456_
After 3 seconds
Press START key.
1 NO=_
Press 03, SPACE..765 keys.
1 NO=03 3404 7765_
*2) Higher 16 digits will be displayed when
Press START key.
registered data is over 16 digits (TSI/CSI/ID/CBM).
Fig. 4-3-21 System Data Programming
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5:PERSONAL BOX PRG.
YES(
←
)
NO(
→
/1-7)
→
key or 1-7
Go to Fig. 4-3-17
←
key
PERSONAL BOX NO.[ ]
ENTER 1-8
1
PERSONAL BOX NO.[1]
YES(
←
)
NO(
→
/)
←
key
→
key
Confidential message already exists in the Box.
ILLEGAL OPERATION
*1)
PERSONAL BOX [CONF]
YES( NO(
←
)
→
)
CONF
POLL
CLOSE
After 3 seconds
←
key
→
key
POLL
CLOSE
Box No. is registered
Box No. is not
registered yet
DELETE PERSONAL BOX?
PRG. PASSWORD [_
ENTER 4 DIGITS
]
PRG. PASSWORD [XXXX]
ENTER 4 DIGITS
YES(
←
)
NO(
→ )
→
key
←
key
Enter 1, 1, 1, 1
Enter 1, 1, 1, 1
PRG. PASSWORD [1111]
YES( NO(→ )
←
)
→
key
←
key
Selected Box Closure
When the registered data of Bulletin
Polling existes in the PERSONAL BOX,
the registered data is deleted from Box.
*1
-
-
-
Initial display when Box NO. is not opened.:
[CLOSE] ; CONF/POLL/CLOSE are selectable.
Displayed when BOX No. is opened for Bulletin POLL.:
[POLL]; POLL/CLOSE are selectable.
Displayed when BOX No. is opened for Confidential.:
[CONF]; CONF/CLOSE are selectable.
Fig. 4-3-22 PERSONAL Box Programming
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6:MEM PASSWORD PRG.
YES( NO( 1-7)
←
)
→
←
key
→
key or 1-7
Go to Fig. 4-3-17
Call incoming form is MEM mode.
Registered password
PRG. PASSWORD [
]
PRG. PASSWORD [XXXX]
ENTER 4DIGITS
ILLEGAL OPERATION
ENTER 4DIGITS
1111
1111
STOP key
3 SEC
SPACE key
DELETE PASSWORD ?
PRG. PASSWORD [1111]
YES(
←
)
NO(
→
)
YES(
←
)
NO(
→ )
→
key
→
key
←
key
←
key
Fig. 4-3-23 Memory Password Programming
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
*1)
8:RESTRICT ID PRG.
YES(
←
)
NO( /1-9)
→
←
key
→
key or 1-9
Go to Fig. 4-3-17.
DEPARTMENT NO. [_ ]
ENTER 01-24
01
DEPARTMENT NO. [01]
ENTER 01-24
No registration
Registered (1234)
ENTER ID [XXXX]
ENTER 4DIGITS
123
ENTER ID [123X]
ENTER 4DIGITS
ENTER ID [_
ENTER 4DIGITS
]
4
Enter 1234 keys.
Registered ID unmatch
1
ID CLOSE
ENTER ID [1234]
YES(
←
)
NO(
→
)
YES(
←
)
NO(
→ )
←
key
→
key
←
key
→
key
2
No registration ID
1
Registered ID
INVALID ID
ALREADY EXIST
2
*1) Displayed when user’s setting RESTRICT ACCESS is set to ON.
Fig. 4-3-24 Restrict ID Programming
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SELECT FUNCTION(OT)
MEMORY AVAIL.=50%
Press OT10 key
PRINTER CLEANING
YES(
←
)
NO(
→ )
←
key
→
key
Wrong paper size
PRINTER CLEANING
EXECUTING
CONFIRM PAPER SIZE
After 3 seconds
End of operation
Press STOP key.
STOPPED
Cover open or paper jam or
no paper or printer alarm
End of feed
Go to stand by.
Fig. 4-3-25 Printer Cleaning Operation
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-4-1.
Copy Operation
07/01/1998 12:34 FAX
SELECT LOCATION(S)
Document on hopper
Press COPY key.
*1
Wrong paper size
*2
PRG. NO. OF COPIES
[ 1SETS] ENTER 1-50
IGNORE PAPER SIZE
YES(← /COPY) NO(→ )
Press 1-9 key.
Press
COPY key
or ← key.
Press → key
or STOP key.
Press COPY
or START key
or after 3 seconds.
PRG. NO. OF COPIES
[07SETS] ENTER 1-50
Press
Press COPY
or START key or
after 3 seconds.
0-9.
In case of 1 set
[01/07]
01
COPYING
01
End of copy
COPYING
*1
When the paper size
is set to OTHER.
End of copy
*2
STD copy can be exeuted
by pressing the YES t
key when "PRG. NO. OF
COPIES" is displayed on
the LCD.
Go to stand by.
Go to stand by.
Fig. 4-4-1 Copy Operation
Message Confirmation Report
12:34 FAX
No document on hopper
No data
Press COPY key.
Confirmation report data
OKI TAKASAKI
12:34 OK
03
NO DATA IN MEMORY
After 3 seconds
After 3 seconds Press COPY key
within 3 seconds.
MSG.CONFIRMATION
TO PRINT,PRESS"COPY"
After 3 seconds Press COPY key
within 3 seconds.
MSG.CONFIRMATION
PRINTING
End of printing
Go to stand-by.
Fig. 4-4-2 Message Confirmation Report
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 108
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-4-3
AUTO REC Key Operation (When MEM.PASWORD is not registered.)
Fig. 4-4-3-1/3 AUTO REC Key Operation (When MEM.PASSWORD is not registered.)
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Attached sheet 1
MSG. IN MEMORY :MEM
Press AUTO REC. key.
MSG. IN MEMORY :FAX
AUTO RECEIVE MODE
After 3 seconds elapsed
PROGRAMMING
FLASH memory writing (1 to a few seconds)
MSG. IN MEMORY :FAX
After 3 seconds elapsed
MSG. IN MEMORY
PRINTING
Feed
Press STOP key.
STOPPED
End of feed
CANCEL ?
YES(
←
)
NO(
→
)
←
key
→
key
(Cancellation)
MEMORY CANCELED
After 3 seconds
elapsed
Go to stand by mode
• The machine enables the manual printout of MSG.
IN MEMORY data by using print operation (F key + OT2).
Fig. 4-4-3-2/3 AUTO REC Key Operation (Attached sheet 1)
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 110
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-4-3
AUTO REC Key Operation (When MEM.PASSWORD is registered.)
Fig. 4-4-3-3/3 AUTO REC Key Operation (When MEM.PASSWORD is registered.)
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Attached sheet 2
MSG. IN MEMORY :MEM
Press AUTO REC. key.
MSG. IN MEMORY :MEM
MEMORY RECEIVE MODE
Press AUTO REC. key (within 3 seconds)
PASSWORD is not registered yet.
PRG.PASSWORD [_
ENTER 4DIGITS
]
Enter 1234 key.
PRG.PASSWORD [1234]
YES(
←
)
NO(
→ )
←
key
←
key
PASSWORD NG
PASSWORD ERROR
PASSWORD
After 3 seconds
elapsed
MSG. IN MEMORY :FAX
AUTO RECEIVE MODE
After 3 seconds elapsed
MSG. IN MEMORY
PRINTING
PROGRAMMING
Feed
Press STOP key.
Writing start after 1 second elapsed
STOPPED
MSG. IN MEMORY :FAX
End of feed
CANCEL ?
YES(
←
)
NO(
→
)
←
key
→
key
(Cancel)
MEMORY CANCELED
After 3 seconds
elapsed
Go to stand by mode
Fig. 4-4-3-2/2 AUTO REC Key Operation (Attached sheet 2)
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 112
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-4-4.
Transmit Resolution and Type of Original
Transmit resolution
Type of original
PHOTO
DARK
07/01/1998 14:14 FAX
SELECT LOCATION(S)
07/01/1998 14:14 FAX
SELECT LOCATION(S)
EX.FINE
FINE
NORMAL
LIGHT
STD
Press
←
key.
Press key.
→
PHOTO
EX.FINE
FINE
DARK
07/01/1998 14:14 FAX
SELECT LOCATION(S)
07/01/1998 14:14 FAX
SELECT LOCATION(S)
NORMAL
LIGHT
STD
Press
←
key.
Press key.
→
PHOTO
EX.FINE
FINE
DARK
07/01/1998 14:14 FAX
SELECT LOCATION(S)
07/01/1998 14:14 FAX
SELECT LOCATION(S)
NORMAL
LIGHT
STD
Press key.
←
Press key.
→
PHOTO
07/01/1998 14:14 FAX EX.FINE
SELECT LOCATION(S) FINE
STD
* Photo mode is fixed to FINE.
Press key.
←
Fig. 4-4-4 Transmit Resolution and Type of Original
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LCD Indication During Transmission
Fig. 4-4-5-1/3 LCD Message During Communication (TX)
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 114
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14:14 T/F
14:14 FAX
RI detection
RI detection
Press HOOK UP & START keys
CNG detection
or TIME OUT
MANUAL RX START
AUTO REC. START
OKI SHIBAURA
03 3456 7890
RECEIVING/ 144
RECEIVING/ 144
PERSONAL ID
REMOTE TEL NO. (TSI/CSI)
If characters of TSI/CSI are alphabets or others
which are possible to display, machine shows it
on the LCD. If the code is impossible to
display, it is repalced by space.
Note)
Fig. 4-4-5-2/3 LCD Message During Commuincation (RX)
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fig. 4-4-5-3/3 LCD Message During Commuincation (Poll. RX)
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 116
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fig. 4-4-6-1/5 Calling Operation (FAX)
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fig. 4-4-6-2/5 Calling Operation (FAX)
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 118
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fig. 4-4-6-3/5 Calling Operation (FAX)
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 119
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fig. 4-4-6-4/5 Calling Operation (FAX)
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 120
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fig. 4-4-6-5/5 Calling Operation (TEL)
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 121
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
From Fig. 4-3-7
*1 Delayed TX
*1 During waiting condition for XMULTIWAIT
14:14 FAX
14:14 FAX
TX TIME
→
04/26 14:14
WAIT A MOMENT
Press STOP key.
Press STOP key.
COMMUNICATION CANCEL
YES(
←
)
NO(
→ )
→
key
←
←
key
*3)
OKI TAKASAKI
CANCEL(
←
)
OTHER(
→ )
No other
→
key
key
*2
communication
No other
communication
Other
communication
CANCELED
Other
communication
After 3 seconds
03 3456 7890
CANCEL(
←
)
OTHER(
→ )
→
key
←
key
*2
CANCELED
After 3 seconds
*2: When other communication is remained,
ID or TEL No. of the other communication is displayed.
When no communication, returns to standby.
*3: When POLLING-TX waiting is cancelled.
WAITING TO BE POLLED
CANCEL(
←
)
OTHER(
→ )
Fig. 4-4-7 Memory Cancel
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 122
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Stand by with document
07/01/1998 14:14 TEL
SELECT LOCATION(S)
OKI TOKYO
SENDING / 144
Press STOP key.
Press STOP key twice.
STOPPED
DOCUMENT REMOVAL
Press STOP key.
After 5 seconds
Document on hopper
07/01/1998 14:14 FAX
RELOAD DOCUMENT
14:14 FAX
Note: STOP key operation is invalid during RX mode, data clear and prefeeding.
Fig. 4-4-8 Stop Operation
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 123
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Voice request from local station
OKI TOKYO
OKI TOKYO
SENDING / 144
RECEIVING/ 144
PIP (PIN) received.
PRI-Q reception
LIFT HANDSET, AND
LIFT HANDSET, AND
PRESS VOICE REQUEST
PRESS VOICE REQUEST
OFF HOOK & V/R key
OFF HOOK & V/R key
Go to standby
Go to standby
Voice request to local station
OKI TOKYO
SENDING / 144
OKI TOKYO
RECEIVING/ 144
Press V/R key.
Press V/R key.
VOICE REQ. ACTIVATED
SENDING / 144
VOICE REQ. ACTIVATED
RECEIVING/ 144
Stop key pressing during memory transmission
OKI TOKYO
STOPPED
SENDING / 144
After 3 seconds
elapsed
Press STOP key.
After 3 seconds elapsed
OKI TOKYO
SENDING / 144
14:14 FAX
Press STOP key.
Fig. 4-4-9 Voice Request
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 124
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
No paper
Paper JAM
NO PAPER
:FAX
PAPER OUT/JAM
:FAX
CHECK PAPER OR PATH
CHECK PAPER OR PATH
No toner *1
No toner *2
TONER LOW
:FAX
14:14 FAX
REPLACE TONER CART.
REPLACE TONER CART.
Option (2nd tray)
Fan alarm
PRINTER ALARM 2:TEL
REFER TO USER GUIDE
PRINTER ALARM 3:TEL
REFER TO USER GUIDE
Fuser error
Pre-feed error
PRINTER ALARM 4:TEL
REFER TO USER GUIDE
07/25/1998 14:14 FAX
RELOAD DOCUMENT
ADF error (jam)
Cover open
DOCUMENT JAM
:FAX
14:14 FAX
CONFIRM AND "STOP"
COVER OPEN
Memory error (except programming area)
Image drum alarm
MEMORY ERROR
:FAX
14:14 FAX
CHANGE DRUM SOON
Warning msg. to replace ID unit because of its life.
Wrong paper size
Drum (T) counter <30 and no ID
ERROR77
CONFIRM PAPER SIZE
Substitution RX in memory *3
Confidential RX in memory
MSG.IN MEMORY:FAX
MSG.IN MEMORY:FAX
REPLACE TONER CART.
Memory reception in memory
MSG.IN MEMORY:MEM
*1: No toner memory RX is ON.
*2: No toner memory RX is OFF.
*3: Alarm factor is shown in low column.
Fig. 4-4-10 Alarm State and Receive into Memory
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 125
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14:14 T/F
OFF HOOK and Remote receive are OK
when parallel telephone is connected.
Ring detection
Without CNG detection
CNG detection
LIFT HANDSET
20 or 35 seconds
Press STOP key.
TIME OUT 20 or 35 seconds (CML ON)
Go to stand by.
Hook up.
14:14 TEL
Press START key.
AUTO REC. START
MANUAL RX START
OKI TOKYO
RECEIVING/ 144
Fig. 4-4-11 TEL/FAX AUTO SW Reception
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 126
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14:14 TAD
OFF HOOK and Remote receive are OK
when parallel telephone is connected.
Ring detection
(T/F timer) Time out 20 or 35 seconds
TAD started
OFF HOOK detection
TAD machine operated
14:14 TAD
TELEPHONE BUSY
CNG detection or
End of TAD operation at TYPE2/TAD
(ON HOOK).
TAD setting: TYPE 3 and 30-sec or
more recording time.
end of TAD operation at TYPE1/TAD
TAD setting: TYPE 3 and 30-sec or
less recording time.
Remote reception is OK.
14:14 TAD
AUTO REC. START
MANUAL RX. START
Go to FAX receive mode.
OKI TOKYO
RECEIVING/144
Fig. 4-4-12 TAD Interface
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 127
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MSG. IN MEMORY:FAX
CONFIRM AND "STOP"
Press STOP key or Message Print
Operation after paper replacement.
MSG. IN MEMORY
PRINTING
End of printing for the
memory reception
Press STOP key.
STOPPED
End of paper feed out (one page)
CANCEL ?
YES(
←
)
NO(
→
)
→
key
←
key
(Cancel)
MEMORY CANCELED
After 3 seconds
Go to stand by mode.
* In case of low toner, print out of memory reception is executed
after paper replacement and "NO TONER MEM.RX=OFF".
In case of toner is OK, print out of memory reception is executed
after paper replacement.
Fig. 4-4-13 Print Out from Memory by Replace Paper
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 128
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press AUTO REC. key.
After 3 seconds elapsed
FLASH memory writting (1 to a few seconds)
After 3 seconds elapsed
Press STOP key.
Feed
End of feed
key
key
(Cancellation)
After 3 seconds
elapsed
Go to stand by mode.
The machine enables the manual printout of MSG. IN MEMORY
data by using print operation (F key + OT2).
Fig. 4-4-14-1/2 Print Out from Memory (Memory Only Reception)
(When MEM. PASSWORD is not registered.)
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 129
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MSG. IN MEMORY :MEM
Press AUTO REC. key.
MSG. IN MEMORY :MEM
MEMORY RECEIVE MODE
Press AUTO REC. key. (within 3 seconds)
PASSWORD is not registered yet.
PRG. PASSWORD[_
ENTER 4DIGITS
]
Enter 1234 key.
PRG. PASSWORD[1234]
YES(
←
)
NO(
key
PASSWORD NG
→ )
→
←
key
(Cancel)
PASSWORD ERROR
PASSWORD
After 3 seconds elapsed
MSG. IN MEMORY :FAX
AUTO RECEIVE MODE
After 3 seconds
elapsed
MSG. IN MEMORY
PRINTING
PROGRAMMING
Writing start after
1 second elapsed
Feed
Press STOP key.
STOPPED
MSG. IN MEMORY :FAX
End of feed
CANCEL ?
YES(
←
)
NO(
→
)
→
key
←
key
(Cancel)
MEMORY CANCELED
After 3 seconds
elapsed
Go to stand by mode.
Fig. 4-4-14-2/2 Print Out from Memory (Memory Only Reception)
(When MEM. PASSWORD is registered.)
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 130
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
POWER ON
Detect message memory data lost
POWER OUTAGE REPORT
PRINTING
End of printing
14:14 FAX
Fig. 4-4-15 Power OFF Report
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 131
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
During memory TX
During RX
During memory RX
OKI TOKYO
SENDING
OKI TOKYO
RECEIVING/ 144
OKI TOKYO
MEMORY-RX/ 144
/ 144
Set documents during memory TX
or set documents during feeder TX
after the end of the pre-scanning.
Set documents.
Set documents.
RELOAD DOCUMENT
Pre-feed error
SELECT LOCATION
Select LOC.
Press
After 3 seconds
FUNCTION key.
Return to previous communication display.
OKI TAKASAKI
YES(START) NO(LOC.)
SELECT FUNCTION (OT)
MEMORY AVAIL.= 090%
Press OT1 key.
Press START key.
←
key
DELAYED TX DATE
DELAYED TX DATE
[07/25]YES(
[
:
]PRG. TIME 0-9
←
)
NO(
→ )
1,2,3,4
→
key
(Refer to Fig. 4-3-7.)
DELAYED TX TIME
[12:34]YES(
DELAYED TX DATE
[_ / ]PRG. DATE 0-9
←
)
NO(
→
)
←
key
→
key
(Refer to Fig. 4-3-7.)
DELAYED TX DATE
[07/26]YES(
key
*1)
←
)
NO(
→
)
Transaction Memory
for communication
is full
←
→
key
Transaction Memory for communication is full or
memory near end.
SELECT LOCATION(S)
SELECT LOCATION
Press LOC. key.
*1: Broadcast and memory TX
are not available when
OKI TAKASAKI
YES(START) NO(LOC.)
Refer to Fig. 4-4-6
Calling Operation (FAX)
memory near end is detected.
Press START key.
MEMORY AVAIL.=080%
SCANNING 01
End of scanning
Document jam
DOCUMENT JAM
TX PREP. ACTIVATED
After 3 seconds
End of communication
After 3 seconds
OKI TOKYO
SENDING
OKI TOKYO
RECEIVING/ 144
OKI TOKYO
MEMORY-RX/ 144
/ 144
Go to stand by.
Fig. 4-4-16 TX Preparation and Dual Access
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 132
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PC mode transmission
PC mode reception
14:14 PC
14:14 FAX
TX command received from PC.
Connect line
RX command received from PC.
Connect line
*1
*1
PC FAX SENDING
PC FAX RECEIVING
End of communication
End of communication
14:14 FAX
14:14 PC
*1: Page numbers for the remote station are not displayed.
Fig. 4-4-17 PC Mode Transmission and Reception
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 133
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Local printer mode for PC
Local scanner mode for PC
14:14 FAX
07/01/1998 14:14 FAX
SELECT LOCATION(S)
Print command receive from PC.
(Printer subsystem = session mode)
Scan command receive from PC.
Press START key.
PRINTING FROM PC
SCANNING TO PC
End of communication
End of communication
14:14 FAX
14:14 FAX
PC loading mode
14:14 FAX
Memory subsystem = session mode
One touch, auto dial and group data
is down load or up load from PC.
PC LOADING
End of loading
14:14 FAX
Fig. 4-4-18 Local Printer and Scanner Operations for PC Mode
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 134
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
04/25/1998 14:14 FAX
SELECT LOCATION(S)
Press FUNCTION key.
1
SELECT FUNCTION (OT)
MEMORY AVAIL.= 100%
Press OT8 key.
Press FUNCTION key or STOP key.
LOCATION PROGRAMMING
ENTER(SRCH,OT,A/D,#)
Press FUNCTION key
(when registration or setting was changed).
Press OT key.
NO=<
FAX NO.
>
PROGRAMMING
ID=< LOCATION ID.>
After 3 seconds
Press STOP key
End of programming + 1 second
(when registration or setting was changed).
NO=_
ID=
PROGRAMMING
NO=03 3404 7123
ID=NEWYORK OFFICE_
End of programming + 1 second
Press START key.
1
NO=< OR LOCATION >
NO=03 3404 7345_
Press START key.
Write Operation of Flash Memory
1) Write operation of flash memory is excuted for location registration, user programming, service-
man setting when the data is entered or changed.
• When the FUNCTION key or STOP key is pressed to return to stand by state, flash memory is
written when message PROGRAMMING is shown on LCD.
2) Write operation of flash memory is executed at the time of system reset (data reset, change of
version) or counter reset
Fig. 4-4-19 Flash Memory Write Operation
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 135
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14:14 FAX
Main Power ON
*1: Go to Power Save mode when machine defects
Power Save condition
Press START key.
POWER SAVE MODE
PRESS "START" TO EXIT
Main Power OFF (Sub Power ON)
OFF Hook detection
Go to Fig. 4-4-6-3/3.
(Calling Operation)
RINGING DETECTED
Set documents
Go to Fig. 4-1-2.
(Typical Reception)
Go to Fig. 4-3-1.
*1) Machine automatically move to Power Save Mode when following conditions are all satisfied.
(1) Power Save Mode = ON (User setting)
(2) Stand by condition without document and alarm
(3) No image data in memory
(4) On Hook
(5) Machine detects power off timer (180 seconds) after above (1) to (4) condition are all estab-
lished.
Fig. 4-4-20 Power Save Mode
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 136
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SELECT FUNCTION (OT)
MEMORY AVAIL. = 100%
OT8
*2 In case of Autodial
*1
LOCATION PROGRAMMING
ENTER(SRCH,OT,A/D,#)
AUTO DIAL NO. [01]
YES(
←
)
NO(
→
/SRCH)
Press SEARCH
key.
In case of all one touch and auto dial were already registered.
*2
Unregistered one touch and auto dial are shown
in order by pressing SEARCH key.
ONE TOUCH NO. [01]
YES(
←
)
NO(
→
/SRCH)
After 3 seconds
or press
←
key.
Press STOP or
→
key.
NO=<
FAX NO.
>
ID=< LOCATION ID. >
NO LOCATION
AVAILABLE
After 3 seconds
NO=_
ID=
03 . . . . 123
NO=03 3404 7123_
ID=
NO=< OR LOCATION
>
Press START key.
After 3 seconds
NO=03 3404 7123
ID=_
NO=_
6
03 . . . . 345
NO=03 3404 7123
ID=6
NO=03 3404 7345_
66
Press START key.
NO=03 3404 7123
ID=N
3
NO=03 3404 7123
ID=N3
Registration to Flash memory is excuted at *1 marked display by
pressing STOP or FUNCTION key or Time out of 59 seconds.
. . . . .
NO=03 3404 7123
ID=NEWYORK OFFICE
Press START key.
Fig. 4-4-21-1/2 Location Programming (OT/Auto Dial)
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 137
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
07/25/1998 10:00 T/F
SELECT LOCATION(S)
1 2 3 4
*1
Copy key is invalid during dual access.
1234_
*4
Press START key.
Press
COPY key.
*2
ONE TOUCH NO. [01]
YES( NO( /SRCH)
Unregistered OT and A/D are shown in order by
pressing SEARCH key.
Go to Calling.
←
)
→
Press STOP
key or key.
After 3 seconds
or press key.
In case of all one touch and
auto dial were already
registered.
→
←
59 seconds T. O
NO=1234
ID=_
SPACE key was used
instead of all data.
NO LOCATION
AVAILABLE
666 . . . . .
Go to stand by.
After 3 seconds
NO=1234
ID=NEW YORK OFFICE
Press START key.
Press STOP key
or F key.
*2
When Auto DIAL No. empty.
AUTO DIAL NO. [01]
YES( NO( /SRCH)
NO=< OR LOCATION
>
or
←
)
→
After 3 seconds
No
prefeeding
1
NO=_
AUTO START = ON
AUTO START = OFF
03 . . . . .
NEW YORK OFFICE
YES(START) NO(LOC.)
Press START key.
NO=03 3404 7345
Press START key.
NEW YORK OFFICE
DIALING
PROGRAMMING
End of programming + 1 second
(Flash memory writing)
1
*1: Copy key is invalid when FUNCTION communication. (Delay TX/Broadcast TX/
Confidential/Polling RX etc.)
Also Copy Key is invalid when numeric key number are entered more than 32 digits.
Fig. 4-4-21-2/2 Location Programming (OT/Auto Dial) during Normal Dial Operation
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 138
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fig. 4-4-22-1/2 Chain Dial (Before Dialing)
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 139
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fig. 4-4-22-2/2 Chain Dial (After Dialing)
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 140
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14:14 FAX
→ [XXXX]
ENTER ID
Enter 1234
3 SEC T.O
INVALID ID
14:14 FAX
→ [1234]
ENTER ID
ID NG
ID OK
Document
No document
14:14 FAX
07/01/1998 14:14 FAX
SELECT LOCATION(S)
Fig. 4-4-23 RESTRICT ACCESS
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 141
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
07/01/1998 14:14 T/F
SELECT LOCATION(S)
OT
OKI TAKASAKI
DIALING
Start of dialing
0273 56 7890
DIALING
During dialing
0273 56 7890
CALLING
End of dialing
BT (Busy Tone) undetection
BT (Busy tone)
detection
MEMORY AVAIL.=50%
MEMORY AVAIL.=50%
SCANNING 03
SCANNING
03
End of scanning
End of scanning
07/01/1998 14:20 T/F
OKI TAKASAKI
SENDING / 144
REDIAL 07/01 14:25
→
End of communication
RESULT=OK
1 SEC T.O
14:14 FAX
Fig. 4-4-24 Instant Dialing Operation
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 142
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MESSAGE CONFIRMATION
07/01/1998 08:05
ID=OKI
DATE
S,R-TIME
00'20"
DISTANT STATION ID
OKI FAX
MODE
CALLING
PAGES
02
RESULT
OK
07/01
0000
Fig. 4-5-1 Message Confirmation Report (MCF)
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 143
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MESSAGE CONFIRMATION
07/01/1998 17:05
ID=OKI
DATE
S,R-TIME
00'20"
DISTANT STATION ID
MODE
B.C.
PAGES
01
RESULT
COMP.
07/01
60A0
150 km
Fig. 4-5-2 IMAGE in MCF with Memory TX
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 144
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ACTIVITY REPORT
07/01/1998 17:05
ID=OKI
TOTAL
DATE
TIME
TIME
CALLING=08:22'
S,R-TIME
CALLED=17:30'
DISTANT STATION ID
MODE
PAGES
RESULT
06/29
06/29
06/29
06/29
06/29
06/29
06/29
06/30
06/30
06/30
06/30
06/30
06/30
06/30
06/30
07/01
07/01
07/01
07/01
07/01
07/01
07/01
07/01
10:00
10:10
10:30
12:05
13:00
15:40
19:00
10:10
10:22
10:50
12:05
15:00
15:30
17:05
19:04
09:00
10:20
10:35
10:50
11:03
13:00
16:00
16:10
01'20"
01'00"
00'20"
01'20"
00'20"
03'25"
00'00"
02'00"
00'12"
01'20"
00'20"
01'30"
00'20"
05'20"
00'20"
01'11"
00'20"
02'23"
00'20"
00'00"
00'24"
01'20"
00'40"
OKI FAX
CALLING
CALLING
CALLING
CALLING
CALLING
CONF=02
02
00
00
03
01
03
01
05
00
03
01
03
01
OK
0000
0485 88 3385
ODS TAKASAKI
OKI FAX
STOP
NO
9080
90C1
OK
0000
03 5476 4300
ODS TAKASAKI
OKI FAX
OK
0000
OK
0000 *1
0000 *2
908E
OK
OKI SHIBAURA
0495 22 5400
0495 22 5400
OKI FAX
CALLED
CALLING
CALLED
CALLING
CALLED
CALLING
B.C.
NO
STOP
NO
9080
9090
STOP
OK
9080
0000 *3
0000
OK
COMP.
STOP
OK
60A0 *4
9080
03 5476 4300
03 5476 4300
CALLING
CALLING
CALLING
CONF=03
CALLED
CALLING
00
02
02
02
01
00
01
01
01
0000
STOP
OK
9080
0000 *1
0000
ODS TAKASAKI
OKI FAX
OK
STOP
NO
9080
03 5476 4300
027 324 2117
ODS
9082 *5
0000 *6
0000 *7
POLL=01
POLLED
OK
OK
*1: Confidential reception
*2: Manual TX
*3: Memory reception
*4: Broadcast TX
*5: Manual reception
*6: Bulletin TX wait state
*7: Memory/Feeder polling TX wait
state
Fig. 4-5-3 Activity Report
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 145
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ACTIVE MEMORY FILES
07/01/1998 17:05
ID=ODC
RECEPTION
ENTRIES
05
PAGES
20
PERSONAL BOX
BOX NO.
MODE
CONF
CONF
POLL
ENTRIES
PAGES
20
02
01
02
05
03
01
01
05
POLLING TX/RX
DATE
TIME
DISTANT STATION ID
OKI
MODE
POLLED
POLLING
PAGES
03
03/19
12:05
TRANSMISSION
DATE
TIME
DIDTANT STATION ID
OKI DATA SYSTEMS
0273242117
MODE
PAGES
03
01
03/20
03/19
03/19
20:00
12:03
19:00
CALLING
CALLING
CALLING
ODC TAKASAKI
02
Fig. 4-5-4 Active Memory Files
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 146
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CONFIGURATION
07/01/1998 17:05
ID=OKI
FUNCTION LIST
01:MCF (SINGLE-LOC.)
ON
02:MCF (MULTI-LOC.)
ON
03:ERR.REPORT (MCF)
ON
04:IMAGE IN MCF
ON
05:SENDER ID.
ON
06:MONITOR VOLUME
LOW
07:BUZZER VOLUME
MIDDLE
08:CLOSED NETWORK
OFF
09:TX MODE DEFAULT
FINE/NORMAL
10:T/F TIMER PRG.
35SEC
11:RING RESPONSE
1RING
12:DISTINCTIVE RING
OFF
13:1'ST PAPER SIZE
A4
14:USER LANGUAGE
ENGLISH
15:INCOMING RING
ON
16:REMOTE RECEIVE
OFF
17:MEM./FEEDER SWITCH
MEMORY
18:POWER SAVE MODE
ON
19:ECM FUNCTION
ON
20:REMOTE DIAGNOSIS
OFF
21:PC/FAX SWITCH
ON
22:NO TONER MEM.RX
OFF
23:MEM.FULL SAVE
OFF
24:CONTINUOUS TONE
OFF
25:INSTANT DIALING
ON
26:RESTRICT ACCESS
OFF
27:WIDTH REDUCTION
OFF
TEL NO.
= 12345678901234567890
= 12345678901234567890
CALL BACK NO.
REDIAL TRIES
3TRY
OFF
REDIAL INTERVAL
3MIN
DIAL TONE DETECT
BUSY TONE DETECT ON
MF(TONE)/DP(PULSE) MF
PALUSE MAKE RATIO 39%
MF (TONE) DURATION 100MS
PULSE DIAL RATE
PULSE DIAL TYPE
PBX LINE
10PPS
NORMAL
OFF
PBX TYPE
NORMAL
OFF
AUTO START
ON
DIAL PREFIX
Fig. 4-5-5 Configuration Report (User)
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 147
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CONFIGURATION
07/01/1998 17:05
ID=OKI
FUNCTION LIST
01:SERVICE BIT
ON
02:MONITOR CONT.
OFF
03:COUNTRY CODE
USA
04:TIME/DATE PRINT
OFF
05:TSI PRINT
ON
06:TAD MODE
TYPE2
07:REAL TIME DIAL
TYPE2
08:TEL/FAX SWITCH
ON
09:MDY/DMY.
MDY
10:LONG DOC. SCAN
OFF
11:TONE FOR ECHO
OFF
12:MH ONLY
OFF
13:H/MODEM RATE
14.4K
14:T1 (TX) TIMER VALUE
059
15:T1 (RX) TIMER VALUE
035
16:T2 TIMER VALUE
060
17:DIS BIT32
ON
18:ERR. CRITERION VALUE
10
19:OFF HOOK BYPASS
OFF
20:NL EQUALIZER
0kM
21:ATTENUATOR
10DB
22:T/F TONE ATT.
10DB
23:MF ATT.
6DB
24:RING DURA. * 10MS
12
25:CML TIMING * 100MS
03
26:LED HEAD STROBE
10100
27:LED HEAD WIDTH
TYPE1
28:MEDIA TYPE
MEDIUM
29:TR LATCH CURRENT
+1
30:NSF SWITCH
ON
31:ID/TSI PRIORITY
ID
32:TONER COUNT CLEAR
OFF
33:PARALLEL PICK UP
ON
Fig. 4-5-6 Service Default Report (Configuration Report: Service bit=ON)
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 148
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEPHONE DIRECTORY P1
07/01/1998 17:05
ID=OKI
LOCATION ID
TEL NO.
PRM. ECHO
RETE
ONE TOUCH
1 OT1 OKI OFFICE
2 OT2 OKI LABORATORY
3 OT3 ODC TAKASAKI
4 OT4 ODC QA/QC LAB.
5 OT5
0001
OR 0101
0002
123 123 123
111 222 333
456 456 456
444 555 666
789 789 789
777 888 999
1234 5678 90123
(ON)
(OFF)
(ON)
(ON)
(ON)
(ON)
(ON)
(ON)
(ON)
(ON)
(14.4)
(14.4)
(14.4)
(14.4)
(14.4)
(14.4)
(14.4)
(14.4)
(14.4)
(14.4)
OR 0102
0003
OR 0103
0004
OR 0104
0005
OR 0105
0006
6 OT6
OR 0106
0007
7 OT7
OR 0107
0008
8 OT8
OR 0108
0009
9 OT9
OR 0109
0010
10 OT10
OR 0110
AUTO DIAL
01 AD01
02 AD02
03 AD03
04 AD04
05 AD05
06 AD06
07 AD07 ODC TAKASAKI
08 AD08
09 AD09
10 AD10
11 AD11
12 AD12
13 AD13
14 AD14
15 AD15
16 AD16
17 AD17
18 AD18
19 AD19
20 AD20
21 AD21
22 AD22
23 AD23
24 AD24
25 AD25
26 AD26
27 AD27
28 AD28
29 AD29
30 AD30
31 AD31
32 AD32
33 AD33
34 AD34
35 AD35
36 AD36
37 AD37
38 AD38
39 AD39
40 AD40
41 AD41
42 AD42
43 AD43
44 AD44
45 AD45
1001
1002
1003
1004
1005
1006
1007
1008
1009
1010
1011
1012
1013
1014
1015
1016
1017
1018
1019
1020
1021
1022
1023
1024
1025
1026
1027
1028
1029
1030
1031
1032
1033
1034
1035
1036
1037
1038
1039
1040
1041
1042
1043
1044
1045
0273 28 1234
Fig. 4-5-7-1 Telephone Directory (1/3)
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 149
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEPHONE DIRECTORY P2
07/01/1998 17:05
ID=OKI
LOCATION ID
45 AD45
TEL NO.
AUTO DIAL
1045
1046
1047
1048
1049
1050
1051
1052
1053
1054
1055
1056
1057
1058
1059
1060
1061
1062
1063
1064
1065
1066
1067
1068
1069
1070
46 AD46
47 AD47
48 AD48
49 AD49
50 AD50
51 AD51
52 AD52
53 AD53
54 AD54
55 AD55
56 AD56
57 AD57
58 AD58
59 AD59
60 AD60
61 AD61
62 AD62
63 AD63
64 AD64
65 AD65
66 AD66
67 AD67
68 AD68
69 AD69
70 AD70
Fig. 4-5-7-2 Telephone Directory (2/3)
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 150
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEPHONE DIRECTORY P3
07/01/1998 17:05
ID=OKI
GROUP_NUMBER_=_#1_#2_#3_#4_#5
#1_ONE_TOUCH
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
AUTO DIAL
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 •••••••
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 •••••••
#2_ONE_TOUCH
AUTO DIAL
#3_ONE_TOUCH
AUTO DIAL
#4_ONE_TOUCH
AUTO DIAL
#5_ONE_TOUCH
AUTO DIAL
Fig. 4-5-7-3 Telephone Directory (3/3)
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 151
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PROTOCOL DUMP
07/01/1998 19:00
ID=OKI TAKASAKI
DATE
TIME
S,R-TIME
*01'33"
DISTANT STATION ID
OKI SHIBAURA(6412)
MODE
PAGES
01 OK
RESULT
0000
04/19
14:49
CALLING
FCF
TX
TSI DCS
PPS EOP
DCN
RX NSF CSI DIS
CFR
MCF
TX
RX
TX
RX
TX
DIS
DTC
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
DCS
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
NSF
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
NSS
FF C8 C4 00 00 84 80 30 40 E4 10 40 B8 39 20 0C 0C 0C 0C 30 82 4A AA 82 42 92 12 CA 04 92 D2 F2
80 40 80 10 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00
NSC
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
RX
DIS
FF CB 01 00 73 17 22 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
DTC
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
DCS
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
NSF
FF C0 04 00 00 84 80 08 40 F4 10 40 F9 7D 20 0C 0C 0C 0C 90 F2 52 72 F2 12 04 92 D2 F2 80 F0 80
40 80 50 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00 00 00
NSS
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00
NSC
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00 00 00
RECEIVED CSI/CIG/TSI
FF C0 02 0C 0C 2C AC 04 4C 4C 04 AC 9C 2C 0C 04 04 04 04 04 04 04 04
TRANSMITTED CSI/CIG/TSI
FF C0 C2 2C CC 4C 8C 04 6C EC 2C AC 04 CC 0C 04 04 04 04 04 04 04 04
RECEIVED SEP/SUB
FF C0 02 0C 0C 2C AC 04 4C 4C 04 AC 9C 2C 0C 04 04 04 04 04 04 04 04
TRANSMITTED SEP/SUB
FF C0 C2 2C CC 4C 8C 04 6C EC 2C AC 04 CC 0C 04 04 04 04 04 04 04 04
Fig. 4-5-8 Protocol Dump Report
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 152
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BROADCAST ENTRY REPORT
07/01/1998 17:05
ID=OKI
LOCATION ID
LOCATION ID
LOCATION ID
ONE TOUCH
1 = OT1
4 = OT4
2 = OT2
5 = OT5
8 = OT8
3 = OT3
6 = OT6
9 = OT9
7 = OT7
10 = OT10
AUTO DIAL
01 = AD1
04 = AD4
07 = AD7
10 = AD10
13 = AD13
16 = AD16
19 = AD19
22 = AD22
25 = AD25
28 = AD28
31 = 31
02 = AD2
05 = AD5
08 = AD8
11 = AD11
14 = AD14
17 = AD17
20 = AD20
23 = AD23
26 = AD26
29 = AD29
32 = 32
03 = AD3
06 = AD6
09 = AD9
12 = AD12
15 = AD15
18 = AD18
21 = AD21
24 = AD24
27 = AD27
30 = AD30
33 = 33
34 = 34
35 = 35
36 = 36
37 = 37
38 = 38
39 = 39
40 = 40
41 = 41
42 = 42
43 = 43
44 = 44
45 = 45
46 = 46
47 = 47
48 = 48
49 = 49
50 = 50
51 = 51
52 = 52
53 = 53
54 = 54
55 = 55
56 = 56
57 = 57
58 = 58
59 = 59
60 = 60
61 = 61
62 = 62
63 = 63
64 = 64
65 = 65
66 = 66
67 = 67
68 = 68
69 = 69
70 = 70
*1
KEYPAD
1234
2345
3456
4567
*1 MAX.10 Locations
Fig. 4-5-9 Broadcast Entry Report
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 153
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BROADCAST CONFIRMATION REPORT
07/01/1998 17:05
ID=OKI
PAGES
= 01
START TIME = 07/01 17:02
TOTAL TIME = 00:02'30"
LOCATION ID
PAGES
RESULT
LOCATION ID
PAGES
RESULT
ONE TOUCH
1 = HEAD OFFICE
3 = OT3
5 = OT5
01
01
01
OK
OK
OK
2 = OT2
4 = OT4
01
01
OK
OK
AUTO DIAL
01 = AD1
03 = AD3
05 = AD5
01
01
01
OK
OK
OK
02 = AD2
04 = GERMAN
01
01
OK
OK
KEYPAD
1234
3456
5678
01
01
01
OK
OK
OK
Fig. 4-5-10 Broadcast Confirmation Report
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 154
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
POWER OUTAGE REPORT
07/01/1998 17:05
ID=OKI
DATE
TIME
S,R-TIME
DISTANT STATION ID
MODE
PAGES
RESULT
06/30
06/30
06/30
06/30
06/30
06/30
10:10
10:30
12:05
13:00
10:50
15:00
0485-88-3385
ODS TAKASAKI
OKI FAX
LOST
LOST
LOST
LOST
LOST
LOST
9080
0000
0000
0000
0000
03
03
01
03
01
01'20"
00'20"
01'20"
CONF=01
CALLED
CALLED
B.C.
03-5476-4300
0495-22-5400
Note: Memory receptin only is printed on the mode in the report as called.
Fig. 4-5-11 POWER OUTAGE REPORT
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 155
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CONFIDENTIAL RX REPORT
07/01/1998 17:05
ID=OKI
DATE
TIME
S,R-TIME
00'00"
DISTANT STATION ID
OKI FAX
MODE
CONF=01
PAGES
02
RESULT
OK
07/01
00:20
0000
Fig. 4-5-12 Confidential RX Report
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 156
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
07/01/1998
09:24
OKI SHIBAURA → OKI HONJO
NO.002
PLEASE
CALL
BACK
OKI SHIBAURA
103 5476 1234
Fig. 4-5-13 Call Back Message
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 157
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CPU-ROM VERSION AA00
HASH
OK
OK
DACD
3142
CPU-RAM
PROGRAM VERSION AA00
HASH OK
LANGUAGE VERSION LL10
HASH OK
DEFAULT VERSION DD10
HASH OK
3F06
A683
*1 RAM1
*2 RAM2
2.5M OK
OK
DEFAULT TYPE
01
07/01/1998 10:30
*1 marked item is shown for condition of all RAM except EXCEED RAM.
*2 marked item is shown to SRAM for EXCEED.
Fig. 4-5-14 Self Diagunosis
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 158
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M C F ( w i t h I m a g e )
M C F ( M u l t i )
M C F ( E r r o r )
M C F ( S i n g l e )
B r o a d c a s t E n t r y R e p o r t
C a l l B a c k M e s s a g e
V o i c e R e q u e s t ( R e c e p t i o n )
V o i c e R e q u e s t ( I n i t i a t e )
S e n d e r I D
R e d i a l i f C o m m u n i c a t i o n E r r o r i n M e m o r y T X
P a g e R e t r a n s m i t
C l o s e d U s e r G r o u p
A u t o m a t i c A l t e r n a t e S e l e c t i n g C a l l
C h a i n D i a l i n g
M a n u a l T X
R e l a y B r o a d c a s t I n i t i a t e
C o n f i d e n t i a l T X
D e l a y e d T X
B r o a d c a s t T X
S i n g l e L o c . T X
Table 4-1 Multiple Function Combinations for Transmissions
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 159
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
T A D
T E L / F A X A u t o m a t i o n S w i t c h
A u t o m a t i c A n s w e r [ F A X ]
R e m o t e R e c e p t i o n
M a n u a l R e c e p t i o n
V o i c e R e q u e s t ( R e c e p t i o n )
V o i c e R e q u e s t ( I n i t i a t e )
T I M E / D A T E P r i n t
T S I P r i n t
C l o s e d N e t w o r k
C o n f i d e n t i a l R e c e p t i o n
M e m o r y O n l y R e c e p t i o n
M e m o r y R e c e p t i o n
I n - b e t w e e n M e m o r y R e c e p t i o n
Table 4-2 Multiple Function Combinations for Reception
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 160
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Polling TX
Polling TX
Note: When reception mode is PC, Polling (TX) from PC
Polling RX
Polling RX
*1 It is possible when remote machine sends DTC
Note: Even if the reception mode is PC, it follows FAX operation.
Table 4-3 Function Combination for Polling TX/RX
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 161
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
F e e d e r
M e m o r y
M e m o r y P a p e r
R X
T X
Table 4-4 Function Combinations during Communications
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 162
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PC1 ON
2'nd
1'st
Standby
ON HOOK
During FAX Calling
During RING RESPONSE
During detection of TEL/FAX
During TAD detection
1st Phase B
Call Reception
Calling ~ Transmission
Transmission after scanning
During Scanning
Feeder TX
Memory TX
Dialling and Calling
During TX
Dialling and Calling
Polling RX
Memory RX
Paper RX
Reception and print
Residual Print Processing
Memory reception
During voice request is initiated.
During copy
During automatic printing of received messages
During automatic printing of reports
During operation
* Operation during communication is not determined yet.
Table 4-5 Preparation TX as Dual Access
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 163
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 4-6-1/2 User Default Setting
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 164
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 4-6-2/2 User Default Setting
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 165
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 4-7-1/2 Technical Default Setting
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 166
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 4-7-2/2 Technical Default Setting
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 167
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 4-8 Default Setting of Dial Parameters
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 168
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 4-9 Plug & Play ID
40672201TX Rev.4
4 - 169
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.
DOCUMENT INPUT
5.1
Document Width
The automatic feeder will operate with the following widths:
Minimum 148 mm (ISO A5)
Maximum 216 mm (NA Letter)
5.2
Effective Reading Width
The effective reading width is listed in Table 5-1.
Table 5-1
Communication
mode/paper width
Document Width
Copy size
Letter
Effective reading width
NA Letter (216 mm)
US/CANADA
G3/A4
215 mm for TX
203.2 mm for local copy*
ISO A4 (210 mm)
INT’L
G3/A4
A4
208 mm for TX
203.2 mm for local copy*
Note local copy: Printable reading width in local copy mode
*: Same printable reading width as TX is available in local copy mode when "width reduction"
is set to on.
5.3
5.4
Transmitter Scanning Method
A 2592-bit Direct Contact Image sensor will be used to scan the document.
Transmit Document Length
The automatic document feeder will feed multiple sheets having a width and length not less
than 128 mm.
The document to be transmitted will be limited to a length not greater than 356 mm (14
inches); however, the machine will also be capable of being set to 1500 mm.
40672201TX Rev.4
5 - 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.5
Scanning Resolution
(1) Horizontal resolution
•
300 dots per inch in horizontal line.
(2) Vertical resolution
•
300 dots per inch, 15.4, 7.7, and 3.85 lines per milimeter in vertical direction.
(switch-selectable)
5.6
5.7
5.8
Automatic Document Feeder Capacity
The feeder will have the capacity to set and feed 20 documents sheets of new standard 20
pound bond Letter/A4 size paper and 15 document sheets of other size paper. The U.S.
rating for paper weights will apply. (Refer to 5.8.1 for Base Weight.)
Contrast Control
The Light and Dark contrasts (low contrast) will be automatically enhanced to improve image
quality.
Slice level shifting has 3 levels of switch selection on operation panel.
Input Document Characteristics
The machine will function with the following types of documents:
5.8.1 Base Weight
The machine will properly feed 20 document sheets of new standard 16 - 20 pound Letter /A4
size paper, and 15 documents of letter/A4-size with a base weight from 21 pounds to 28
pounds. The base weight is defined as the weight of 500 sheets of paper having rectangular
dimensions of 431.8 mm (17 inches) by 558.8 mm (22 inches). A single sheet of 32 pounds
base weight can be used.
5.8.2 Thickness
The machine will automatically feed 20 document sheets of letter/A4 size, each having a
cross-sectional measurement between front and back surfaces ranging from 0.08 to 0.13 mm.
A single sheet of from 0.06 to 0.15 mm can be fed.
Note:
For reference purposes, Sections 5.8.1 and 5.8.2 are based on common bond paper.
And printed paper by itself is available.
40672201TX Rev.4
5 - 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.8.3 Opacity
The machine will properly reproduce documents which allow less than 40% of the scanner
source light to pass through them.
5.8.4 Shape
The feeding mechanism requires that input documents be rectangular in shape. The
registration of triangular, circular and wavy-edge documents cannot be guaranteed.
5.8.5 Document Condition
Slightly worn documents, such as those resulting from “normal office handling” will be
accepted by the feeder without the use of a carrier. “Normal office handling” is defined to
include staple holes, letter folds and minor corner folds, but excludes wrinkled copies.
5.9
Document Damage
The document will not be marked, wrinkled or torn as a result of being sent through the feeder
or scanner.
5.10 Document Jam Detection
Transmission will stop and a line disconnection will occur when the end of the document is not
detected within 356 mm after scanning begins (except if unlimited). A jam will also be
declared if the document does not reach the scanning position within about 10 seconds after
the start of a document feed, which will be fed automatically immediately after the document
is set on the ADF.
Note:When a jam is detected during message transmission, the machine will stop, but its
receiving capability will remain valid.
5.11 Feeder Reliability
Jam occurrence and misfeeds in the automatic document feeder will be less than one in 500
operations for all documents and conditions specified in Section 5.7 “Input Document
Characteristics” except oily documents and printed paper by itsself.
For oily documents and printed paper by itsself, it will be meet in Figure 5-1.
40672201TX Rev.4
5 - 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
%
Less than 1/100
Less than 1/200
80
65
(Humidity)
35
20
10
20
32
30
°C
(Temparature)
Figure 5-1
5.12 Document Jam Removal
A means will be provided for the operator to manually release the feed mechanism to aid in
clearing a jam.
The operator will be able to clear 95% of all paper jams without tools or disassembly. The
maximum number of operator-uncorrectable jams will be one in 10,000 of documents fed.
5.13 Document Skew
When documents are loaded correctly, there will be a maximum of 1 mm skew over any
advance of 100 mm. The occurrence of skew exceeding 1 mm any advance of 100 mm shall
be 0.5% or less. (Except printed paper by itself)
Due to the document skew, the extra-scanning area of background at the bottom 1-3 mm
copy page will be less than 1 mm in length.
The occurrence of the extra scanning area of background more than 1 mm in length shall be
0.5 % or less. (Grand total of any kind of document.)
40672201TX Rev.4
5 - 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.14 Document Stacking
Documents up to 297 mm in length, which meet the basic weight and thickness specification,
will exit on the stacker, and documents of letter or A4-size will stack in sequence.
The documents will be placed on the feeder face down.
The first sheet will be fed into the feeder first and will exit on the stacker with printing side
down.
5.15 Feeder Separation Rubber Useful Life
The separation rubber will not require replacement for at least 30,000 document feeds,
providing documents and conditions meet the specifications in Section 5.8 “Input Document
Characteristics”.
40672201TX Rev.4
5 - 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.
DOCUMENT OUTPUT
6.1
Receive Printing Method
Electro-photographic recording method using a LED (light emitting diode) array as the light
source.
6.2
Effective Recording Width
Printing area
PW
EW
L
R
T
P L
Recording
paper feeding
direction
Printing area
E L
B
40672201TX Rev.4
6 - 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table A
Printable area
Letter Size
A4 Size
14 inch Legal Size
13 inch Legal Size
inch
11
8.5
mm
inch
mm
inch
mm
inch
mm
PL
PW
EL
EW
T
279.4
216
11.7
297
14
355.6
216
349.6
203.2
3
13
330.2
216
324.2
203.2
3
8.27 210
8.5
8.5
10.76 273.4
11.46 291
13.76
8.0
12.76
8.0
8.0
203.2
8.0
203.2
0.12
0.12
0.25
0.25
3
3
0.12
0.12
0.13
0.13
3
0.12
0.12
0.25
0.25
0.12
0.12
0.25
0.25
B
3
3
3
L
6.35
6.35
3.4
3.4
6.35
6.35
6.35
6.35
R
Guaranteed printing area
Letter Size
A4 Size
14 inch Legal Size
13 inch Legal Size
inch
mm
inch
11.7
8.27 210
11.2 284.3
7.77 197.3
mm
inch
mm
inch
mm
PL
PW
EL
EW
T
11
279.4
216
297
14
355.6
216
13
330.2
216
8.5
10.5
8.0
8.5
8.5
266.7
203.2
13.5
8.0
342.9
203.2
12.5
8.0
317.5
203.2
0.25
6.35
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.25
6.35
0.25
6.35
0.25
6.35
B
0.25
0.25
0.25
6.35
6.35
6.35
6.35
6.35
6.35
0.25
0.25
0.25
6.35
6.35
6.35
0.25
0.25
0.25
6.35
6.35
6.35
L
R
Note:
The printable area means the area allowing actual printing at the time of receiving.
The guaranteed printing area means the area where the printing quality is guaran-
teed.
This table does not include vertical and horizontal addressing error
(± 3 mm) of recording paper
40672201TX Rev.4
6 - 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.3
Recording Paper
The approved paper for this machine will be Xerox 4200 type or equivalent. A fundamental
technical specification will be provided to Customer by OKI to allow qualification of alternative
sources.
6.3.1 Recording Paper
The automatic feeder will operate with the following sizes.
A4
:
:
:
:
(210 mm x 297 mm)
(8.5 inch x 11 inch)
(8.5 inch x 14 inch)
(8.5 inch x 13 inch)
LETTER
LEGAL
LEGAL
6.3.2 Automatic Recording Paper Feeder Capacity
The 1st cassette feeder will have the maximum capacity to store and feed 100 recording
paper sheets of Letter/A4 Legal size. Paper sheets of new standard 20-pound copy bond
Letter/A4/Legal size paper (Xerox 4200). The U.S. rating for paper weights will apply. (Refer
to 6.4.1 for Base Weight.)
6.4
Input Recording Paper Characteristics
The machine will function with the following types of paper.
6.4.1 Base Weight
The machine will properly feed paper of A4, Letter and Legal size paper with a base weight
from 16 pounds to 24 pounds. The base weight is defined as the weight of 500 sheets of
paper having rectangular dimensions of 431.8 mm (17 inches) by 558.8 mm (22 inches).
6.4.2 Thickness
The machine will automatically feed Recording Paper of A4, Letter and Legal size, each
having a cross-sectional measurement between front and back surfaces ranging from 0.08
mm to 0.12 mm.
Note: For reference purposes, sections 6.4.1 and 6.4.2 are based on common bond paper.
40672201TX Rev.4
6 - 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.4.3 Shape
The feeding mechanism requires that Recording Paper be rectangular in shape. The registra-
tion of triangular, circular and wavy-edge Recording Paper cannot be guaranteed.
6.4.4 Recording Paper Condition
Only new paper is available.
6.5
Recording Paper Jam Detection
Paper jam will occur when the top of the paper is not detected by the first sensor within about
7 seconds (plan) after feeding begins.
A jam will also occur when printing time is over the limit, and each (A4/Letter/Legal) feeding
length (time) is over the limit of about 45 mm.
6.6
Feeder Reliability
1st cassette:
Jam occurrence in the automatic feeder will be less than one in 1500 operations for all
Recording Paper and conditions specified in Section 6.4 “Input Recording Paper Characteris-
tics”.
Misfeeds will be less than one in 500 operations.
2nd cassette:
Not available.
6.7
Recording Paper Jam Removal
A means will be provided for the operator to manually release the feed mechanism to aid in
clearing a jam.
The operator will be able to clear 95% of all paper jams without tools or disassembly. The
maximum number of operator-uncorrectable jams will be one in 10,000 recording paper fed.
40672201TX Rev.4
6 - 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.8
6.9
Recording Paper Skewing
The maximum allowable skew of the recording paper is ±1 mm over any advance of 100 mm.
Copy Density
The density of a black image printed on plain paper will be greater than 1.2 O.D.* regardless
of uniformity in all printing areas. The density of the white background (unprinted area) will be
no greater than 0.2 O.D. unit. All density measurements will be referred to a McBeth RD914
Densitometer.
* : 1.2 O.D. is guaranteed within the range shown in Figure 8-1.
*Note:
O.D. of 1.2 or more (at 10 cm position after the test pattern print started).
Measured 30 min. after the test pattern print started.
6.10 Copy Uniformity
Printed copies will exhibit a uniform density of printed and background areas, within a varia-
tion of 25% units from edge to edge of a single copy and within a variation of 30% units from
one copy to the next.
6.11 Copy Stacking
The machine will discharge printed copies and stack them without jamming providing the
paper sizes are A4, Letter and Legal.
Copies will be stacked in the order in which they are printed without operator intervention and
the stacking mechanism will have a capacity of * 30 copies maximum.
The printed copies will be discharged on the stacker with printed face up.
* Note: 1) Using the recommended paper.
40672201TX Rev.4
6 - 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.12
Toner Cartridge/Image Drum unit useful life
6.12.1 Toner Cartridge
Useful life of Toner Cartridge is as below.
1,875 pages/4% duty
(Duty means the ratio of black area in the white area)
Note 1: The first toner cartridge installed a new image drum unit will have a
decreased yield because the image drum unit itself has to be filled.
Note 2: 1,875 pages will be specified as an average of 5 cartridge's usage
6.12.2 Image Drum unit
Useful life of Image drum is as below.
4,500 pages/1 page per job.
8,000 pages/3 pages per job.
10,000 pages/Continuous print
40672201TX Rev.4
6 - 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7.
COMMUNICATION
7.1
Transmission Line
The machine will reliably communicate with distant stations over voice-level telephone line.
7.2
Telephone Line Connection
The machine will be connected to the telephone line via a Network Control Unit (NCU). One
RJ-11 connector will be provided to connect the line.
The machine will control the switching between the external telephone and the telephone line
to permit the user to use the optional handset or telephone for voice communication.
7.2.1 International NCU
The NCU will be designed and constructed to meet worldwide PTT requirements.
Modular connectors will be provided for connection to the telephone and telephone line,
depending upon each PTT requirement.
7.3
7.4
Communication Mode
The machine will operate as a half-duplex facsimile transceiver. Transmit and receive
operations cannot take place at the same time.
Modem Operation
The high-speed modem will conform to ITU-T standard V29 for 9600/7200 bps (bits per
second) operation and to ITU-T standard V27 ter. for 4800/2400 bps operation, and to ITU-T
standard V.17, V.33 for 14400/12000 bps operation.
The low-speed (300 bps) modem will conform to ITU-T standard V21 channel 2 or equivalent.
40672201TX Rev.4
7 - 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7.4.1 Transmission Mode
The machine is designed to change the message transmitting speed in accordance with the
following fall-back plan, which is shown in the table 7-1.
Table 7-1
Fall-Back
Rank
Transmission
Speed (bps)
No. of
Training
RTN
received
Protocol
1st
2nd
3rd
4th
5th
6th
ITU-T V.17 (V.33)
ITU-T V.17 (V.33)
ITU-T V.17 (V29)
ITU-T V.17 (V.29)
ITU-T V.27 ter.
14400
12000
9600
7200
4800
2400
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
ITU-T V.27 ter.
7.4.2 Signal Level
The send will be -10.5 dBm for the US/Canada versions, -10dBm for the INT'L version and
will be -11.5 dBM for the GER version, as a PTT requirement. None of the versions will
provide an adjustable attenuator, but the sending level can be programmed by keypad
control.
The receive modem will function with an incoming signal in the range of zero to -40 dBm or -6
to -43 dBm.
7.5
Protocol and Data Transmission
The unit will conform to the following protocol and data transmission procedures:
Group 3 - ITU-T recommendations T.30 and T.4
OKI Special Protocol
High-Speed Protocol - the T.30 handshaking procedure will be conducted at
messagetransmission speed instead of 300 baud, during TX multi-page and multi-document
transmissions.
Note: This feature disable when you set 9.6k to the H/Modem Rate (technical setting
No.13).
40672201TX Rev.4
7 - 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7.6
7.7
Data Compression
The machine will use the Modified Huffman (MH), Modified Read (MR) and Modified Modified
Read (MMR) redundancy-reduction coding schemes.
Minimum Scan Line Time
The minimum scan line time for communication is shown below.
Remote FAX
Compatible OKI
Machine
G3
FX-051
TX
RX
0 ms
0 ms
0 ms
* 10/5 ms
*
10 ms
5 ms
:
:
3.85 r/mm
7.7 r/15.4 r/mm
7.8
7.9
Compatibility
All versions will be compatible with machines conforming to the ITU-T recommendations for
Group 3.
Ring Detect Sensitivity
The Ring Detect Sensitivity will meet the each PTT Requirement.
40672201TX Rev.4
7 - 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8.
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
8.1
Power
8.1.1 AC Voltage Range
The machine will operate within A/B, as shown in Table 8-1. Operation within the ranges
listed will be on a continuous basis.
Table 8-1 Voltage Range
Voltage
Range
Nominal Value
(Volts)
MinimumValue
(Volts)
Maximum Value
(Volts)
A: U.S./CANADA
B: INT’L
120
230
102
198
127
*250
Note:
The power supply will actually work at 264 volts, but the maximum value shows
250 volts according to PTT regulation.
8.1.2 Frequency Range
The machine will operate on AC power having a frequency in the range of 49 to 61 Hertz.
8.1.3 Transients
The machine will operate without error under the following conditions:
Dropouts:
Noise: [without error]
500 V (Pulse width:100 ns/800 ns, Rising time: 1 ns)
[without memory loss]
1000 V (Pulse width: 100 ns/800 ns, Rising time: 1 ns)
10 msec (Period: 1 sec)
8.1.4 Power Consumption
The machine will not exceed the maximum values shown in Tables 8-2 and 8-2a.
40672201TX Rev.4
8 - 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8.1.4.1
US/CANADA Versions
Table 8-2 Power Consumption
Mode
Typical Power
(W)
Max. Power
(W)
Transmit
Receive
Copy W
Standby
16
104
141
5.4
18
115
157
6.1
8.1.4.2
INT’L Versions
Table 8-2 a Power Consumption
Mode
Typical Power
(W)
Max. Power
(W)
Transmit
Receive
Copy W
Standby
18
20
112
157
102
143
6.5 (0.35)
7.7 (0.46)
( ): Power save mode = ON
* Chart: ITU-T No. 1
40672201TX Rev.4
8 - 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8.1.5 Rush Current
15 times nominal current or 30A for 1/2 cycle
8 times nominal current or 15A for 3 cycle
(Nominal current: copy mode)
8.2
Overheat Protection
The heater in the fuser unit is controlled by the thermister and temperature control circuit.
A built-in thermostat in the fuser unit prevents the heater from being overheated in the event
of failures in the thermister temperature control circuit, etc.
The thermostat does not reset after cooling down.
Humidity
8.3
The machine will operate as specified at relative humidities in the range of 20 percent to 80
percent (non-condensing). Operation outside this range will be subject to the limitations
shown in Figure 8-1.
8.4
8.5
Temperature
The machine will operate as specified in the temperature range of 10 Celsius to 32 Celsius.
Operation outside this range will be subject to the limitations shown in Figure 8-1.
Shock
The unpackaged machine will withstand 60 G’s of shock for 2 ± 2 ms on its vertical axis. Test
methods will be in accordance with ASTM-D-3332-77.
40672201TX Rev.4
8 - 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8.6
Vibration
The un-packaged machine will withstand 1/2 G vibration from 2 to 200 Hz for one hour.
Sweeptime will be 1/2 octave per minute.
Test methods will be in accordance with ASTM-D-3580-77T.
Temperature and Humidity Conditions
90
85%
28°C 85%
18°C 80%
80
27°C 80%
73%
10°C 73%
70
0°C 64%
60
32°C 54%
50
40
30
43°C 29%
20
10
0
32°C 20%
10°C 20%
0°C 10%
43°C 10%
18°C
28°C
27°C
15°C
43°C
10
20
40
30
DRY BULB TEMPERATURE [°C]
Area enclosed by lines with
Area enclosed by lines with
: Range where printing is guaranteed.
: Range for storage without power supply.
(Note)
The curve connecting 28°C, 85% and 0°C, 64%
is the condensation curve.
Figure 8-1
40672201TX Rev.4
8 - 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8.7
Static Electricity
Electrostatic Discharge Immunity will meet as follows.
Applicable Standard:
Test method:
EN50082-1/1992
IEC801-2/1984
8.8
8.9
Acoustic Noise
Acoustic noise emitted by the machine will not exceed 55 dBA at 1 meter under any condi-
tions.
Radiation
Radio frequency interference and electromagnetic conduction will meet as follows.
FX-051 APPLICABLE EMI STANDARDS
(A) ODA (U.S./CANADA)
FCC part 15 (Class B)
(B) OEL-INT (Italy, Denmark,
Norway)
CENELEC EN55022 (Class B)
(Australia)
(C) GER (Germany, Switzerland,
Austria)
Ditto
(D) UKF (U.K, France)
Ditto
(E) OKI-INT (Out of Europe)
CISPR Publ. 22 (Class B)
8.10 Spurious Noise Level
The spurious noise level will meet the each PTT requirement.
8.11 Electrical Noise
Electrical noise while in idle status will meet the each PTT requirement.
40672201TX Rev.4
8 - 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8.12 Storage Conditions
The machine will not be affected by long-term storage under the following conditions:
Relative humidity:
Temperature:
10 to 90 percent non-condensing
-10 to +50 degrees Celsius
40672201TX Rev.4
8 - 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9.
SERVICEABILITY
9.1
Fault Isolation
9.1.1 Field problems will be diagnosed by replacement of circuit boards and mechanical
components, with the aid of local diagnosis.
9.1.2 Problem diagnosis will be accomplished by the use of a standard 20 K ohm/volt volt-ohm
meter (VOM).
9.1.3 Cables or special tools will be designed by OKI if required for field service.
9.2
9.3
9.4
Adjustments
All adjustments will be defined including procedures, unique test charts, and special tools. A
recommendation on field and shop adjustments will be provided.
Assembly/Disassembly
A field service technician will not have to use a soldering iron to remove any replaceable sub-
assembly.
Connector Designation
No label will be provided for identification of plugs because adequate measures against mis-
insertion of plugs are taken in the system by; (1) different number of connector pins, (2)
different connector pin pitch, and (3) connector cable not in reach.
40672201TX Rev.4
9 - 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10.
OVERALL PERFORMANCE
10.1 Mean Time Between Failures (MTBF)
The MTBF for the overall machine will exceed (3,000) hours of actual operation. The MTBF
will be measurable at a confidence level of 95 percent under controlled laboratory conditions.
The MTBF will be based on 50 percent transmit and 50 percent receive activity.
10.2 Standardization
The machine will meet all specifications established by the 1996 version of ITU-T
recommendation, as follows:
Recommendation T.4
-
Group 3
Recommendation T.30 - Procedures
10.3 Image Transmission Time
The time required to send a “ITU-T No. 1 Test Chart” from the machine to another Group 3
facsimile machine or between FX-051 machines, will not exceed the values listed in Table 10-
1.
Table 10-1
FX-051
Initial
Intermediate
Final
12.0 sec.(V17/29)
2.5 sec.(V17/29)
4.0 sec.(V17/29)
Procedure
Time
G3
Basic
Image
Time
14400 Standard 8.0 sec.
Fine 11.0 sec.
Note: The above table shows the values under the following conditions:
• Sender ID:
ON
• Speed protocol:
• Feeder TX mode
OFF
* In the case of auto answer. Measured from the time of Answer.
In the case of another chart being applied, the above specified times will not be applied.
40672201TX Rev.4
10 - 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10.4 Copy Resolution
The resolution of the received copy will be as follows:
Scanning: 200* dots/inch x 3.85 lines/mm or 300 dots/inch x 7.7 lines/mm or 15.4 lines/mm
* : Convert from 300 to 200
Printing:
300 dots/inch x 784 lines/inch
Note : The image smoothing process is used for printing.
Resolution will be measured by transmitting a IIEEJ No. 2 Test Chart or equivalent between
two machines and measuring the resolution of bar patterns.
10.5 Readability
Test Chart:IIEEJ No. 2 chart.
1. Readability (pattern 7)
(Ex.) At No. 3 in pattern 7, more than six should be read from eight of the received
copies in standard mode.
At No. 4 in the same as above, more than six should be read from the received
copy in fine mode.
2. Readability (pattern 15 characters)
(Ex.) The characters on the received copy of 10.5 points should be readable at more
than 28 characters in FINE mode.
The received copy should be generated by the same model as TX.
3. Tapered Lines (horizontal)
(a)
Black tapered line on a white background:
(Ex.) The black line should be printed less than 0.1.
(b)
White tapered line on a black background:
(Ex.) The white line should be distinguished less than 0.2.
4. Tapered Lines (vertical)
(a)
Black tapered line on a white background:
(Ex.) The black line should be printed less than 0.2.
(b)
White tapered line on a black background:
(Ex.) The white line should be distinguished less than 0.3.
Note: Final agreement should be made after QA meeting between Customer and OKI
(to determine the criteria etc.).
40672201TX Rev.4
10 - 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11.
AGENCY LISTING/SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
The machine will meet the agency listing requirements as set forth in the AGREEMENT to
which this Specification is attached. This includes, but is not limited to, the following.
A.
B.
C.
UL, FCC, OSHA in the U.S.
CSA, IC in Canada
VDE, IEC, BABT, CEPT, CISPR, Applicable PTT’s regulation(s)
40672201TX Rev.4
11 - 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12.
12.1 Vibration
The packaged product is tested by the vibration test of project 1A in the pre-shipment test of
SHIPPING CONDITIONS
N.S.T.A.
12.2 Drop Test
The packaged product will be tested by the drop test of project 1A in the pre-shipment test of
N.S.T.A.
12.3 Static Compression
The packaged product will withstand a load equal to a 14-foot stacking height with pallet(s)
height in defined as the optional test of the N.S.T.A.
Note:
The packaged product shall comply with the N.S.T.A’s requirements but may not
put the N.S.T.A’s mark on the carton box.
40672201TX Rev.4
12 - 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13.
13.1 ASTM-D3332-77
ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials
APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS
Standard test methods for mechanical-shock fragility of products, using shock machines.
Specification dated January 1978.
13.2 FCC Part 15, Class B
Federal Communications Commision, U.S.A.
Radio Frequency Devices — Part 15
13.3 NSTA
National Safe Transit Association Test Procedures for Packaged Products
13.4 UL 1950
Underwriters Laboratory, U.S.A.
Standard for Safety, Information Processing and Business Equipment
13.5 CSA STD C22.2 No. 950
Canadian Standards Association, Canada Information Processing and Business Equipment
13.6 IEC Publication 950
International Electrotechnical Commission, IEC Standard Safety of information technology
equipment including electrical business equipment
13.7 EN60950
Safety of information technology equipment, including electrical business equipment.
40672201TX Rev.4
13 - 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13.8 FCC Part 68, Subpart D
Federal Communications Commision, U.S.A.
Connection of Terminal Equipment to the Telephone Network - Part 68 Conditions for Regis-
tration — Subpart D
13.9 IC CS-03 Issue 7
Industrie, Canada
Standard for Terminal Equipment, and Connection Arrangements Systems, Network Protec-
tion Devices
13.10 Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA)
Congressional Legislation of the United States dated 1970.
13.11 ITU-T Recommendations
International Telecommunications Union - Telecommunication Standardization Sector (ITU-T).
The 1996 version of ITU-T Recommendations T.4 and T.30 only approved by the accelerated
approval procedure (Resolution No.1).
13.12 No.2 IIEEJ (The institute of image electronics engineer of Japan)
13.13 VDE 0878
Prufstelle des verbandes Deutscher Electrotechniker (VDE) Radio interference suppression of
telecommunication systems and apparatus, General Specifications
13.14 BS6305 and relevant regulations
British Standards Institution, U.K.
BS6305 - General requirements for apparatus for connection to the British Telecommunica-
tions public switched telephone network
40672201TX Rev.4
13 - 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13.15 EMC Directive 89/336/EEC (CE-mark)
EN 50081-1/1992: Electromagnetic compatibility - Generic emission standard
Part 1: Residential, commercial and light industry
EN 50082-1/1992: Electromagnetic compatibility - Generic immunity standard
Part 1: Residential, commercial and light industry
13.16 Unique International Requirement for Line Connection
13.16.1
DTS (Der Telefax Standard)
13.17 Requirement for options
13.17.1 MFP software (PC interface)
User option (INT'L)
Standard (ODA)
40672201TX Rev.4
13 - 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14.
MACHINE PACKAGING AND CONFIGURATIONS
14.1 Shipping Carton Marking
OKI will use a Customer-provided printing layout for the production of the shipping carton
used for each machine. OKI will forward the shipping carton size requirements to Customer,
when they are known. Customer will prepare and send to OKI the printing layout. Generally,
shipping cartons have:
A. Four printed panels
B. One color of ink printed
C. Less than 50% ink coverage
OKI will properly mark each shipping carton with the enclosed machine model and serial
number.
14.2 General Configurations
The Vender agrees to configure machines to satisfy OEM user's marketing plan. There may
be multiple models of the machine, each model having unique items installed. Models will be
configured to include the following items:
A.
B.
Serial/Model tag with unique model number for a particular area or market.
Language-oriented materials installed on each machine, including operator
control panel overlay, instructional decals, warning decals, service decals, and other
decals as required.
C.
Any hardware and/or software change that is required for a particular model to make it
compatible with a market or a country requirement.
40672201TX Rev.4
14 - 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14.3 Machine Models
Following machine models will form the basis for the configurations distributed worldwide by
A. Model
B. Model
ODA (120V)
OEL
- Designed to meet the requirements for the U.S. Canada.
- Designed to meet the requirements of Europe except GER/
UKF.
C. Model
D. Model
GER
UKF
- Designed to meet the requirements of BZT.
Austria/Switzerland Group
- Designed to meet the requirements of United Kingdom/
France.
E. Model
F. Model
ODA (230V)
OKI-INT
- Designed to meet the requirements of Latin/South America.
- Designed to meet the requirements out of Europe. (Austra-
lia, New Zealand, Singapore etc.)
14.4 Package Contents
Refer to Table 14-1.
40672201TX Rev.4
14 - 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FX-051 Packing Contents (Tentative)
FX-051
Package Contents
Part Name
OKI/ODA Brand
OEL
OEM Brand
ODA
OKI TN
European Countries Other
N.A. L.A.
countries GER
INT GER UKF INT
Packaged contents in OUK
Facsimile unit
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
I/D unit
Document stacker
Carrier sheet
Toner cartridge
1
1
1
1
1
1
AC power cord (GER)
AC power cord (Australia)
AC power cord *
TEL/LINE cable (*US)
TEL/LINE cable (FTZ)
TEL/LINE cable (each countries)
Dust cover (TM-6-DCI)
User's guide
1
1
1
* 1
1
1
1
* 1
1
1
1
1
User's guide **
1
5
One touch sheet
5
Packaged contents in ODA
Toner cartridge
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
User's guide
AC power cord (UL/CSA)
MFP Software (Jet Suite)
*: Part type is selected by destination countries
**: Part is packed or not by destination countries
Table 14-1 Package Contents
40672201TX Rev.4
14 - 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Oki Data Corporation
Tokyo, Japan
APPENDIX A
MFP Function
for FX-051
August, 1999
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Contents
1. INTRODUCTION ....................................................................................................................... A-1
1.1
1.2
1.2.1
SUMMARY ........................................................................................................................A-1
Host PC Function .............................................................................................................. A-3
PC PRINTER Function......................................................................................................A-3
1.2.1.1 Printer Block ......................................................................................................................A-4
1.2.2 PC SCANNER Function ....................................................................................................A-6
1.2.2.1 Scanning Block ................................................................................................................. A-7
1.2.3
1.2.4
PC FaxModem Function.................................................................................................. A-10
PC MEMORY .................................................................................................................. A-12
2. CONCURRENT OPERATION .................................................................................................. A-14
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
STANDALONE & HOST PC ............................................................................................. A-14
HOST PC & STANDALONE ............................................................................................. A-14
HOST PC & HOST PC ..................................................................................................... A-14
Driver & Application MENU .............................................................................................. A-16
Paper Size, Printable Area ............................................................................................... A-17
3. BI-DIRECTIONAL PARALLEL INTERFACE............................................................................. A-20
40672201TX Rev.4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. INTRODUCTION
1.1 SUMMARY
By installing the MFP software (Jet Suite), the following MFP (Multi-Function Peripheral)
function can be realized.
Example:
• PC Printer function (300/Q600 dpi)
• PC Scanner function
8 PPM (at NA Letter)
300 dpi
• PC FaxModem function (TIA/EIA Class 1)
• PC Memory function
• PC Multiplex function
Enable
Interface between Fax machine and Host PC consists of three layer structure as detailed
below, Each sub-system can be operated at the same time by adopting a Oki-MFPI
protocol in both Fax machine and Host PC.
FX-051
Host PC
Printer
(Hiper-W) (Oki-SCL)
Scanner
Memory
(MFPI.)
Printer
(Hiper-W)
Memory
(MFPI.)
Scanner
(Oki-SCL)
FaxModem
(Class 1)
FaxModem
(Class 1)
Application Layer
Data Link Layer
Physical Layer
Oki-MFPI
Oki-MFPI
IEEE 1284
IEEE 1284
(Fig. 1)
40672201TX Rev.4
A-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
a) Application layer:
Performs a function control of each sub-system at the Host PC and Fax
machine.
b) Data-Link layer:
Performs a protocol control at the Host PC and Oki-MFPI
(Packetize/Unpacketize,flow control, Transfers command/data between each
sub-system)
c) Physical layer:
Has a bi-directional interface control circuit which comforms to IEEE1284.
Standard mode:
Compatible, Nibble
Oki special mode: MCE (Mode Change Express)
Following devices are as sub-system:
1) Printer (HIPER-W: Host based Image PrintER for Windows)
Encodes a raster image data in Host PC and transfers a data with HIPER-W.
2) Scanner (Oki-SCL: Oki-Scanner Control Language)
Transfers an image data of document scanned in Fax machine to the Host PC
with Oki-SCL command.
3) FaxModem (TIA/EIA Class 1)
Send/receive a Class 1 command between Host PC and Fax machine .
4) Memory (MFPL: Multi-Function Peripheral Language)
By using MFPL command, it is possible to display on screen of Host PC for
condition of Fax machine and performs the initial registration of the telephone
number used in Fax machine.
40672201TX Rev.4
A-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.2 Host PC Function
1.2.1 PC PRINTER Function
1) Performs a coding compression of a raster image data in Host PC, and by using
Hiper-W command (ORIPL), encoded data is transferred to Fax machine at high-
speed (MCE mode) and printed as decompressed decoded data in sub-system
side of the machine (printer).
Compression mode: ACC32
2) By using Hiper-W command (OPEL), it is possible to read a status of the machine
(printer) and establish an environment setting.
* Oki-MFPI
• Packetized data flow.
• Data=MFPL Command/Responce, Hiper-W Command/Responce
• Designates "UNIT ID=Printer"
• Contents becomes MFPL and Hiper-W command
Bi-Centro I/F: Compatible & Nibble, MCE Mode
example
Packet lnd Unit ID Length Contents
* Example: "MFP Device Driver" processing
• Converts from printing data to raster data (bitmap)
• Raster data encoding (ACC)
Bi-Centro Receive
(Receive DMA)
• Resources assurance of Printer (MFPL)
• Environment setting by using Hiper-W
• Data transmission by using Hiper-W
• Resources release of Printer (MFPL)
Note: Packetize with Oki-MFPI
FIFO buffer/Page Memory
(Unpacketize)
(Decode DMA)
Raster Buffer (ASIC)
Video I/F
LED HEAD (300 dpi/Q600, 8 PPM)
(Fig. 2)
40672201TX Rev.4
A-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.2.1.1 Printer Block
Specification
Item
PC printer
No.
1
Option (Standard for ODA version)
1) Resolution:
300 dpi, Quasi-600 dpi
2) Smoothing
3) Paper feed - Insert:
OST-EX (Quasi-600 dpi)
100 sheets/1st tray
1 sheet for manual feed
Face up, 30 sheets
4) Paper feed - Eject:
5) Paper feed - Insert (option): None
6) 1st Tray - Paper size:
7) Medium support:
8) Manual-Paper Size:
Letter/A4/Legal 13"/Legal 14"
Manual feed for Envelope*1
Letter/A4/Legal 13"/Legal 14"/
Executive/A5/JIS B5/A6/
Monarch/COM-10/DL/C5/
16 - 24 lb
Main functions
2
9) Paper weight:
10) Paper size setting:
11) Paper end detector:
12) Toner low detector:
13) Cover open detector:
Software OPE panel
Not equipped
Equipped
Equipped
14) Fusing temperature abnormal: Protection equipped
15) Paper width detector:
16) Ejection full detector:
Not equipped
Not equipped
Note. *1: Available with below condition.
1) With reforming the envelope as culing upward.
2) Paper-Jam occurrence will be less than one in 20 operations.
40672201TX Rev.4
A-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1) Printable Area/Guranteed Printing Area
a) Guaranteed printing area is respectivity an inside 0.25 inch (6 mm) from the
upper/lower ends and left-right both ends for recording paper.
b) Physical printable area of practical can be printed as below:
• 50 dots = 0.17 inch (4.3 mm) from the upper ends for recording
paper
• 50 dots = 0.17 inch (4.3 mm) from the lower ends for recording paper
• 50 dots = 0.17 inch (4.3 mm) without relationship to the recording paper
for left-right both ends except Letter/Legal 13/Legal 14
inch)
(75 dot=0.25
c) Since practical printing area is definition by each emulation,
Refer to “Printer Sub-system Command” for details.
d) Refer to “2.5” as for printing area by HIPER-W emulation.
Guaranteed Printing Area
8.00" x 10.5"
Paper Size
8.50" x 11.0"
8.50" x 13.0"
8.50" x 14.0"
7.25" x 10.5"
3.87" x 7.50"
4.12" x 9.50"
4.33" x 8.66"
6.38" x 9.01"
8.27" x 11.69"
5.83" x 8.27"
7.16" x 10.12"
4.13" x 5.83"
Recording Paper
Letter
8.00" x 12.5"
8.00" x 13.5"
6.75" x 10.0"
3.37" x 7.00"
3.62" x 9.00"
3.83" x 8.16"
5.88" x 8.51"
7.77" x 11.19"
5.33" x 7.77"
6.66" x 9.62"
3.63" x 5.33"
Legal 13
Legal 14
Executive
Monarch Envelope
COM-10 Envelope
DL Envelope
C5 Envelope
A4
A5
B5 (JIS)
A6
* B5 of DIN standard is not supported. B5 is only JIS standard.
40672201TX Rev.4
A-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.2.2 PC SCANNER Function
1) Transfers an image data of document scanned in Fax machine to the Host PC by
using Oki-SCL command.
2) Twain Driver of Host PC transfers the read data to the Scanner Application of
OCR (Optical Character Recognition) and Image Editer etc.,.
* Oki-MFPI
¥ Packetized data flow.
¥ Designates "UNIT ID=Scanner"
¥ Contents becomes MFPL and Oki-SCL command
Bi-Centro I/F: Compatible & Nibble, MCE Mode
example
Packet lnd Unit ID Length Contents
Bi-Centro Send
* Example: "MFP Device Driver" processing (TWAIN source)
¥ Resources assurance of Scanner (MFPL)
(Transmission DMA)
¥ Environment setting by using Oki-SCL
¥ Data receive by using Oki-SCL
¥ Resources release of Scanner (MFPL)
Transmission Buffer Memory
¥ Transfers the scan data to AP via TWAIN source manager
Note: Unpacketize the received data with Oki-MFPI
(MFPI packetize by software)
Scan Buffer
(Scanning DMA)
ADF CIS
(300 dpi/FaxStd/FaxFine,2-level/Multi-level)
(Fig. 3)
40672201TX Rev.4
A-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.2.2.1 Scanning Block
Specification
Item
Scanning area
No.
1
Horizontal scanning: 216 mm (Max.)
Vertical scanning:
355.6 mm (Max.)
1) Scanning mode:
Line Art/Dither/4,6 bit Multi-level
(16, 64 Level Gray scale)
CIS 300 dpi
2) Sensor:
3) Scanning resolution:
Horizontal x Vertical scanning
8 dot/mm x 3.85/7.7/15.4 line/mm
75 dpi x 75 dpi (multi level only)
300 x 300 dpi/15.4 lines/mm
1 to 100%
4) Zoom:
5) Black and white reverse: Not provided
6) Mirror image output:
7) Density:
8) Contrast:
Not provided
-1 (Light) - +1 (Dark)
-1 (Min.) - +1 (Max.)
Dither/Multi-level mode
Center aligning
Fixed
2
Main functions
9) Document guide:
10) Dither pattern:
11) Scanning speed:
TBD
12) Coding compression:
13) Scanning window setting:
TIFF like (2 level only)
Vertical axis only
40672201TX Rev.4
A-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1) ADF (auto document feeder) Block
Specification
No.
1
Item
Document width:
Document length:
Min.; 148 mm (A5 width)
Max.; 216 mm (Letter width)
Min.; 100 mm
Max.; 355.6 mm (Legal length)
Used document
size
Note:
When the document is less than 148mm (width) and 100mm
(length), the document must be used with a carrier sheet.
abc¥¥¥¥
Scanning
direction
2
Length
Scanning line
direction
Document feeding
direction
Width
40672201TX Rev.4
A-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2) Reading Area
Horizontal Scanning Direction
CIS Sensor
Effective Reading Area
2.2 mm
(white)
2.2 mm
••••••• 300 dpi Sensor
215 mm
3) Reading Size
Remarks
Scanning direction
Reading width
*2
17 (reduction ratio:1%) to
Horizontal scanning
direction
*3
2592 (reduction ratio: 100%)
picture elements
1 to 5477 line
*1
Vertical scanning
direction
*1: Designates with 1/15.4 mm unit.
*2: 8 dot/mm
*3: 300 dpi
40672201TX Rev.4
A-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.2.3 PC FaxModem Function
1) Transmission function of PC FaxModem transfers an image data to the remote
Fax machine by using Class 1 command (EIA/TIA-578) when transmission image
data is prepared by Host PC.
2) Class 1 receiving detects ringing from the remote Fax machine and informs
ringing detection to the Host PC, and then, Fax machine receives an image data
from the remote Fax machine and transfers received image data to the Host PC
by using Class 1 command (EIA/TIA-578).
3) Maximum transmission speed:14.4 kbps
a) PC FaxModem transmission (Class 1)
* Oki-MFPI
• Packetized data flow.
• Data=MFPL Command/Responce, TIA/AT Command/Responce
• Designates "UNIT ID=FaxModem"
• Contents becomes MFPL and TIA/AT command
Bi-Centro I/F: Compatible & Nibble, MCE Mode
example
Packet lnd Unit ID Length Contents
* Example: "MFP Device Driver" processing
(FAX driver with AP)
• Resources assurance of FaxModem by running AP
(MFPL)
Bi-Centro Receive
(Receive DMA)
Buffer Memory
(Unpacketize)
• Prepares the encoded data
• Environment setting by using TIA/AT Command
• Data transmission by using TIA/AT Command
• Resources release of FaxModem according to the
communication end (MFPL)
Note: Packetize with Oki-MFPI
Class 1 Control
T30 (PSTN), Modem Control
(Fig. 4)
40672201TX Rev.4
A-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
b) PC FaxModem receiving (Class 1)
* Oki-MFPI
• Packetized data flow.
• Data=MFPL Command/Responce, TIA/AT Command/Responce
• Designates "UNIT ID=FaxModem"
• Contents becomes MFPL and TIA/AT command
Bi-Centro I/F: Compatible & Nibble, MCE Mode
example
Packet lnd Unit ID Length Contents
Bi-Centro Send
(Transmission DMA)
* Example: "MFP Device Driver" processing
(FAX driver with AP)
• Resources assurance of FaxModem by running AP
(MFPL)
• Environment setting by using TIA/AT Command
(Incoming call)
Buffer Memory
(Packetize)
• Data receiving by using TIA/AT Command
• Resources release of FaxModem according to the
communication end (MFPL)
Class 1 Control
Note: Unpacketize with Oki-MFPI
T30 (PSTN), Modem Control
(Fig. 5)
40672201TX Rev.4
A-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.2.4 PC MEMORY
1) It is possible to perform reading of status for Fax machine and up-load/down-load
of dialing data for telephone number initial registration by using MFPL command
(OPEN).
a) PC Memory Read (Status reading/Dialing data reading)
* Oki-MFPI
• Packetized data flow.
Data=MFPL Command/Responce only
• Designates "UNIT ID=RAM Memory"
• Contents becomes only MFPL
Bi-Centro I/F: Compatible & Nibble, MCE Mode
example
Packet lnd Unit ID Length Contents
Bi-Centro Send
* Example: "MFP Device Driver" processing
(Transmission DMA)
• Resources assurance of Memory by using MFPL
• Read Memory Data by using MFPL
• Resources release by using MFPL
Note: Unpacketize read-in File in Oki-MFPI
Transmission Buffer Memory
(Oki-MFPI packetize
by software)
Status/Dial
Registration Memory
User Programming
(Fig. 6)
40672201TX Rev.4
A-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
b) PC Memory Write (Dialing data registration)
* Oki-MFPI
• Packetized data flow.
Data=MFPL Command/Responce only
• Designates "UNIT ID=RAM Memory"
• Contents becomes only MFPL
Bi-Centro I/F: Compatible & Nibble, MCE Mode
example
Packet lnd Unit ID Length Contents
* Example: "MFP Device Driver" processing
• Prepares for write-in Memory data
• Resources assurance of Memory by using MFPL
• Writes Memory Data by using MFPL
• Resources release by using MFPL
Bi-Centro Receive
(Receive DMA)
Receiving Buffer Memory
( Unpacketize by software)
Note: Packetize write-in File in Oki-MFPI
Dial Registration Memory
(One-touch, Coded dial)
(Fig. 7)
40672201TX Rev.4
A-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. CONCURRENT OPERATION
Concurrent operation for the Fax machine can be classified the following combinations:
2.1 STANDALONE & HOST PC
A part of MFP function for the simultaneous operation is possible during the Fax
operation.
2.2 HOST PC & STANDALONE
A part of Fax machine function for the simultaneous operation is possible during the MFP
function operation.
2.3 HOST PC & HOST PC
A part of other MFP functions for the simultaneous operation are possible during a part of
MFP function operates.
Note 1: For detail of concurrent operation (dual access), see table of page 15.
40672201TX Rev.4
A-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4
Combination table of DUAL ACCESS and MULTI-TASKING capability
* Basic designing conception in "DUAL ACCESS and MULTI-TASKING"
•
•
Performance for FAX machine (DUAL ACCESS)
• Machine accepts to operator who handles the documents.
• Machine accepts to automatic receiving.
Performance for MFP machine. (MULTI-TASKING)
• Operator can use to printer machine except busy of printer resouse.
Stand-Alone
Receive
Paper
PC
Class1-TX
2nd Act.
Send
Memory
Local
Scanner
Printer
1st Act.
Class1-RX
Copy
Feeder
Memory Mem. Scan
*2
Print *
*2
Feeder
Memory
Paper
Send
Rec.
Stand-
Alone
Memory
Mem. Scan
Print *
*1
Copy
Scanner
Printer
PC
Class1-TX
Class1-RX
Printer * ----- Printing of substitutional received data, several reports.
/ Possible combination.
Remarks
/ Impossible combination
Oblique / Impossible combination because of double assigned resource.
*1: TX reserve on feeder.
*2: Available to copy after scanning.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4
FX-051
(INT'L)
FX-051
(ODA)
GROUP
COMMENT
ITEM
Hiper-W
Opt*
Opt*
Opt*
Opt*
Opt*
Std
Printer Driver
Scanner Driver
TWAIN compatible.
CLASS1 compatible
Std
Std
Std
Std
Drivers
FAX Modem Driver
This driver has follow operations mainly
• Packet operations on Oki-MFPI
• IEEE1284 (Bi-Centro)
Oki-MFPI Driver
Installer
Installing Drivers and Applications
(except for PCFAX APP and OCR APP)
This APP reads image data with Scanners subsystem (TWAIN),
and printers it with Printer subsystem (Hiper-W).
2up/4up copy enabled.
Copy APP
Setup APP
Opt*
Std
Std
Std
Std
Enable to change the data of One Touch & Auto Dial from
the HOST.
Applications
Opt*
Opt*
Display the status of MFP-function.
CLASS1
Status Monitor APP
PCFAX APP
(including Viewer)
Opt*
(*) Optional Bi-Centro Board with these "Opt" softwares (this optional package means "MFP Package")
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.5 Paper Size, Printable Area
: Guaranteed Printing Area
: Printable Area (ORIPL Emulation)
8.5” (2550)
8.5” (2550)
8.0” (2400)
8.0” (2400)
0.17” (50)
0.17” (50)
10.5”
(3150)
11.0”
(3300)
12.5”
(3750)
13.0”
(3900)
Letter
Legal 13”
0.17” (50)
0.17” (50)
0.25” (75)
0.25” (75)
0.25” (75)
0.25” (75)
:
7.25” (2175)
6.75” (2025)
8.5” (2550)
8.0” (2400)
0.17” (50)
0.17” (50)
10”
(3000)
10.5”
(3150)
14.0”
(4200)
13.5”
(4050)
Excutive
Legal 14”
0.17” (50)
0.17” (50)
0.17” (50)
0.17” (50)
0.25” (75)
0.25” (75)
40672201TX Rev.4
A-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.12” (1237)
3.62” (1087)
3.87” (1162)
3.37” (1012)
0.17” (50)
0.17” (50)
9”
(2700)
9.5”
(2850)
7.5”
(2250)
7”
(2100)
Monarch
COM-10
0.17” (50)
0.17” (50)
0.17” (50)
0.17” (50)
0.17” (50)
0.17” (50)
0.17” (50)
4.33” (1299)
3.83” (1149)
6.38” (1913)
5.88” (1763)
0.17” (50)
8.16”
(2448)
8.66”
(2598)
9.01”
(2704)
8.51”
(2553)
DL
C5
0.17” (50)
0.17” (50)
0.17” (50)
0.17” (50)
0.17” (50)
0.17” (50)
8.27” (2480)
5.83” (1748)
5.33” (1598)
7.77” (2330)
0.17” (50)
0.17” (50)
11.69”
(3507)
7.77”
(2330)
11.19”
(3357)
8.27”
(2480)
A4
A5
0.17” (50)
0.17” (50)
0.17” (50)
0.17” (50)
0.17” (50)
0.17” (50)
40672201TX Rev.4
A-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7.16” (2149)
6.66” (1999)
4.13” (1240)
3.63” (1090)
0.17” (50)
0.17” (50)
5.83”
(1749)
5.33”
(1598)
A6
10.12”
(3035)
9.62”
(2885)
B5 (JIS)
0.17” (50)
0.17” (50)
0.17” (50)
0.17” (50)
0.17” (50)
0.17” (50)
40672201TX Rev.4
A-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Bi-directional Parallel Interface
IEEE 1284-B interface is used.
1) Connector
• Printer side: 36-pin receptable
• Cable side:
36-pin plug
2) Cable
• IEEE Std 1284-1994 compliant cable is recommended for noise
prevention.
• Cable length: 6 ft (1.8m) max.
3) Connector pin arrangement
18
36
1
19
4) Signal level
• Low: 0V to +0.8V
• High: +2.4V to 5.0V
5) Modes
IEEE 1284
• Compatible mode
• Nibble mode
6) Data bit length
8 bits
40672201TX Rev.4
A-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7) Interface circuit
a) Receiving circuit
+5V
R
R=3.3KΩ (1.0KΩ Strobe/Iprime)
b) Sending circuit
+5V
2.2KΩ
(Open Collector)
40672201TX Rev.4
A-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4
Compatible
nStrobe
Logic
Negative
Positive
Negative
Positive
Positive
Positive
Negative
Nibble
Host Clk
Data 1(LSB) - 8 (MSB)
PtrClk
Pin No.
1
2 - 9
10
Functions
Data strobe
Data line from/to host
Completion of reception or function
Data reception not possible
No paper
Signal Name Signal Direction
Data Strobe
Data Bit n
→ Printer
↔ Printer
nAck
Busy
PError
Select
nAutoFd
Acknowledge
Printer →
Printer →
PtrBusy
AckDataReq
Xflag
HostBusy
11
12
13
14
Busy
Paper End
Printer →
Printer →
On-line
Mode switch request
Not used
Select
Auto Feed
→ Printer
-
Not defined
15
-
-
16
-
Logic Gnd
Signal ground
0V
-
17
-
Chassis Gnd
Frame ground
Chassis Ground
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Peripheral Logic High
Signal Ground (nStrobe)
Signal Ground (Data 1 - 8)
Signal Ground (PError,Select, nAck)
Signal Ground (Busy, nFault)
Signal Ground (nAutoFd, nSelectIn, nInit)
nInit
18
19
20 - 27
28
Power supply (max. 50mA) (option)
Signal ground
5V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
Printer →
-
-
-
-
Signal ground
Signal ground
Signal ground
Signal ground
29
30
31
32
-
nInit
nFault
Negative
Negative
Initialize
Error occurrence, On-line
Signal ground
Input Prime
→ Printer
Printer →
-
nDataAvail
Not Defined
Fault
0V
33
-
34
-
Not Defined
Not used
-
-
-
Not Defined
1284 Active
35
36
Fixed to logic "1"
Mode switch request
-
Printer →
→ Printer
nSelectIn
Negative
Select In
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Oki Data Corporation
Tokyo, Japan
APPENDIX B
FAX2NET Product Spefication
for FX-051
September, 1999
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
1. Outline ...................................................................................................................................B-1
2. FAX2NET Services................................................................................................................B-1
2.1
ServiceTypes............................................................................................................B-1
3. Setup Items ...........................................................................................................................B-2
3.1
3.1.1 FAX Network Registration.........................................................................................B-2
3.2 Destination Registration............................................................................................B-3
Registration Information............................................................................................B-2
3.2.1 E-Mail Address Registration .....................................................................................B-3
3.2.2 WEB URL Registration .............................................................................................B-3
3.2.3 Group Registration....................................................................................................B-3
3.3
Menus .......................................................................................................................B-4
3.3.1 User Program............................................................................................................B-4
3.3.2 Location Program .....................................................................................................B-4
3.4
3.5
3.6
Characters Allocated to UNIQUE Keys.....................................................................B-4
Characters Allocated to One-Touch Keys .................................................................B-5
Entering Lowercase Characters ...............................................................................B-5
4. Functions...............................................................................................................................B-7
4.1 Single Destination Sending.......................................................................................B-7
4.1.1 International Call .......................................................................................................B-7
4.1.1.1 Alarm ........................................................................................................................B-7
4.1.2 E-Mail Address .........................................................................................................B-8
4.2
Broadcasting.............................................................................................................B-8
4.2.1 Destination Specification ..........................................................................................B-8
4.2.2 Sending Operation ....................................................................................................B-8
4.3
WEB Printing ............................................................................................................B-8
4.3.1 Requests...................................................................................................................B-8
4.3.1.1 Alarms.......................................................................................................................B-9
4.3.2 Reception..................................................................................................................B-9
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
Confidential and Relay Sending................................................................................B-9
PBX Setting ............................................................................................................B-10
Polling Reception ....................................................................................................B-10
Other Restrictions ...................................................................................................B-10
40672201TX Rev.4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Procedure ............................................................................................................................B-11
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
Telephone Number .................................................................................................B-11
E-Mail Address .......................................................................................................B-12
WEB Address .........................................................................................................B-13
Character Conversion Table....................................................................................B-14
Check Sum .............................................................................................................B-15
6. Operation.............................................................................................................................B-16
7. Reports................................................................................................................................B-30
7.1
7.2
7.3
Message Confirmation Report................................................................................B-30
Telephone Directory Report ....................................................................................B-30
Lowercase Character Description Support .............................................................B-31
7.3.1 Location ID..............................................................................................................B-31
7.3.2 Distant Station ID ....................................................................................................B-31
7.4
7.5
Communication Mode Column Description ............................................................B-31
Service Code Description .......................................................................................B-31
8. Service Codes .....................................................................................................................B-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.
Outline
This specifications describes the addition and modification caused to mount functions using
FAX2NET service (that is a facsimile service via internet) in the FX-051.
2.
FAX2NET Services
2.1
Service Types
The FAX2NET service is a facsimile communication service using the FAX2NET-supplied
internet. The FAX2NET server distributed in each country transfers facsimile data via the
internet. A user facsimile can use internet functions by communicating with the neighboring
FAX2NET server.
Of the FAX2NET-supplied functions, the following five functions are mounted in the FX-051
(1) FAX over IP
Route: FAX(A) -> FAX2NET server (P) -> FAX2NET server (Q) -> FAX(B)
A general telephone line is connected between the FAX(A) and server and
between the server (Q) and FAX(B). Servers (P) and (Q) are connected via
internet.
The FAX(A), that is connected to server (P) via a telephone line, reports informa-
tion, e.g., remote-subscriber’s facsimile number and user account, to the server
using DTMF tone. The FAX(A) then sends facsimile data using a normal T.30
protocol. Server (P) searches for a server (server (Q)) nearest the received
remote-subscriber’s facsimile number (FAX(B)) and sends facsimile data via
internet. Server (P) that received facsimile data sends it to the FAX(B) through a
telephone line. Communication between server (Q) and FAX(B) is performed by
normal facsimile sending.
(2) FAX to E-mail
Route: FAX(A) -> FAX2NET server(P) -> Internet mail server (Q) -> PC(B)
A general telephone line is connected between the FAX(A) and server (P) and
between the server (Q) and FAX(B). Servers (P) and (Q) are connected via
internet.
The FAX(A), that is connected to server (P) via a telephone line, reports informa-
tion, e.g., remote-E-mail address and user account, to the server using DTMF
tone. The FAX(A) then sends facsimile data using a normal T.30 protocol. Server
(P) searches for a server (server (Q)) nearest the received remote-E-mail address
(PC(B)) and sends facsimile data via internet. Server (P) that received facsimile
data sends an E-mail to the remote address as an attached file of the mail. The
PC(B) receives the E-mail attached to the facsimile data via mail server (Q).
(3) Virtual E-mail
Route: PC(A) -> FAX2NET server (P) -> FAX(B)
The FAX(B) is allocated to a virtual E-mail address by the FAX2NET server. An
E-mail issued from the PC(A) is converted to facsimile data by the FAX2NET
server (P). The FAX2NET server (P) then sends the facsimile data to the FAX(B)
using the T.30 protocol.
40672201TX Rev.4
B-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The FAX(B) only performs the normal G3 facsimile receiving operation; so, the
user need not prepare a special protocol.
(4) Web retrieval
Request route: FAX(A) -> FAX2NET server (P)
Receiving route: Web server (W) -> FAX2NET server (P) -> FAX(A)
Web server (W) and server (P) are connected via internet. The FAX(A) and server (P),
and the server (P) and FAX(A) are connected through a general telephone line.
The FAX(A) reports a Web URL to be fetched to server (P) and disconnects the line once.
FAX2NET server (P) converts a specified Web page to facsimile data, issues a call to the
FAX(A), and sends the data to the FAX(A) with the T.30 protocol.
A special protocol is not used in a Web page receiving route. This is a normal G3 fac-
simile reception for the FAX(A).
(5) Payment Card Registration
Request route: FAX(A) -> FAX2NET server (P)
FAX(A) reports the payment card number to the FAX2NET server (P) using DTMF tone.
Continuosly, FAX2NET server sends the registered result image report to the FAX(P) as
the facsimile image data by the normal T.30 protocol.
3.
Setup Items
3.1
Registration information
The following items are added to the already registered items.
3.1.1 Facsimile Network Registration
(1) FAX2NET server telephone number
Telephone number of the FAX2NET server to be used. Max. 32 digits. At setting of
PBX, this number must be registered, including DIAL PREFIX for PBX-> PTT switching.
(2) Account number
ID particular to a terminal registered in the FAX2NET service. The user must fetch this
number individually from FAX2NET.
Account Number (10-digit maximum) + PIN Number (4-digit maximum)
(3) International telephone prefix
Number required to decide whether the FAX2NET service should be started. When the
prefix of the destination telephone number matches a registered number, a call is issued
to the FAX2NET server. If DIAL PREFIX is specified for the PBX, a number following a
dial prefix (and hyphen, blank or pause) is compared with the international telephone
prefix.
Max. 10 digits
When an E-mail address/Web URL is included in a communication destination not
communicated, the server telephone number and account number cannot be deleted.
(Illegal operation)
If either the server telephone number or account number is deleted, another one is also
deleted.
40672201TX Rev.4
B-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.2 Destination Registration
3.2.1 E-mail Address Registration
An E-mail address can be registered in up to 10 portions fitting to on-touch keys 1 to 10.
Each address must be composed of up to 64 characters: uppercase letters, lowercase letters,
digits, and symbols. For details on the applicable characters, see Section 5.4.
The user can begin E-mail address registration by selecting E-mail registration in the one-
touch destination registration. For details on operation, see Operations.
Whether an entered character string is appropriate is not checked.
Each E-mail address is internally stored in a separate area from a general one-touch registra-
tion telephone number storage area.
When an E-mail address is registered, the one-touch parameter is initialized.
3.2.2 WEB URL Registration
WEB URL can be registered in 10 portions fitting to one-touch keys 1 to 10.
Each address must be composed of up to 64 characters: uppercase letters, lowercase letters,
digits, and symbols. For details on the applicable characters, see Section 5.4.
The user can begin URL registration by selecting URL registration in destination registration.
In this case, the user need not prefix http://.
For details, see Operations.
Whether an entered character string is appropriate for Web URL is not checked.
When Web URL is registered, the one-touch parameter is initialized.
3.2.3 Group registration
To register a group destination, an abbreviated dial can be mixed with O.T. in which an E-mail
address is registered and one in which other general telephone number is registered.
However, a group destination cannot be registered, including an O.T. key in which Web URL
is registered. If an attempt is made to add Web URL to a group, message “NOT PRO-
GRAMMED” appears.
When an account number is not registered, O.T. in which an E-mail address is registered
cannot be specified for group destination.
When an account number is not registered, if a group including an E-mail address in a group
is selected as a destination, the E-mail address is deleted from the group registration. When
no group destination remains as a result of the deletion, if the group is specified at selection of
a communication destination, message “NOT PROGRAMMED” appears.
40672201TX Rev.4
B-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.3
Menus
For details on the menus, see Operations.
3.3.1 User Program
Add item “FAX2NET Server Registration” to No. 8.
Under “FAX2NET server registration,” specify a FAX2NET server telephone number,
FAX2NET account number, and international telephone prefix.
3.3.2 Location Program
When “registration in one-touch key” is selected, if an account number is already registered,
branches appear so that the user can select whether a telephone number E-mail address or
Web URL is to be registered.
If telephone number registration is selected, the screen changes to the conventional one-
touch key registration screen.
If E-mail address or Web URL registration is selected, the screen changes to a new E-mail
address registration or Web URL registration screens.
After an E-mail address or Web URL is registered, if an account number is deleted, the user
can select only the telephone number registration screen for one-touch registration. In this
case, the E-mail address or Web URL is stored internally. If an account number is registered
again, the stored E-mail address or Web URL becomes valid.
While no account number is registered, if a new telephone number is registered, the E-mail
address or Web URL is deleted.
When both a telephone number and E-mail address or Web URL are registered in one O.T.
using RMCS (an account number is already registered), the E-mail address or Web URL has
priority.
3.4
Characters Allocated to UNIQUE Keys
The following five kinds of special characters are newly assigned to UNIQUE keys to help the
user enter an E-mail address and Web URL:
At mark
: @
Under score: _
Tilde
: ~ (Since this system does not support “~,” “-1” is displayed on the LCD instead.)
Back slash : \
Percent:
:%
Double quotation: ”
40672201TX Rev.4
B-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.5
Characters Allocated to One-Touch Keys
The following characters can be used on each character entry screen by allocating them to
one-touch keys 1 to 6. The CAPS function is allocated to one-touch key 7; so, it is valid at
entry of an E-mail address and Web URL. See Fig.3 FX-051 control panel.
O.T. No.1
O.T. No.2
O.T. No.3
O.T. No.4
O.T. No.5
O.T. No.6
O.T. No.7
: .
: _
(Since this system does not support “~,” “-1” is dis-
played on the LCD instead.)
: ~
: ”
: /
: @
: CAPS
3.6
Entering Lowercase Letters
Lowercase letters can be entered on the Web address and E-mail address entry screens.
CAPS ON <=> CAPS OFF toggle switching is enabled by pressing O.T. 7. The default is
CAPS OFF (lowercase letters enabled) is set on the E-mail address entry and Web URL entry
screens.
40672201TX Rev.4
B-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fig 3 FX-051 Control Panel
40672201TX Rev.4
B-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.
Functions
4.1
Single Destination Sending
4.1.1 International Call
This function checks a destination telephone number prior to dialing and determines whether
the FAX2NET function is to be used.
When the FAX2NET server telephone number, account number, or international telephone
prefix is not registered, a call is issued to a destination telephone number as normal G3
facsimile sending.
If a dial prefix is set, it is first compared with the prefix of the destination telephone number.
When the dial prefix matches the prefix of the destination telephone number, a part excluding
the dial prefix and subsequent hyphen, blank, or pause from the destination telephone
number is compared with an international telephone prefix.
When an international prefix matches the prefix of a destination telephone number, a call is
issued to a number registered as a FAX2NET server telephone number.
The result of communication with the FAX2NET server is described in the Activity report.
Whether a target call arrives at the last destination cannot be recognized from FX051. The
user must confirm the communication result on the FAX2NET Web page.
4.1.1.1Alarms
When a destination telephone number consists of only a dial prefix and international tele-
phone prefix, a sending destination telephone number is missing. This is assumed to be a
calling error with service code 909D without calling operation.
When the FAX2NET server returns no reply or is busy, the fax waits for redialing according to
redial setting in the same way as normal sending.
If DTMF tone “D” is sent instead of DTMF tone “B,” information cannot be set in the FAX2NET
server. The fax then cuts off the line, displays an alarm message on the LCD, lights on the
alarm LED lamp, and sounds alarm. In this case, do not redial because registration informa-
tion about the FAX2NET server may be incorrect. The service code is 14D0.
When the TA time lapsed after calling to the FAX2NET server was completed, if DTMF tone
“A” is not sent from the FAX2NET server, the fax cuts off the line and enters the redial wait
state. (Handled as the destination no-reply state.)
When the TB time lapsed after the sending of a sending destination number, etc. ended with a
DTMF tone, if DTMF tone “B” or “D” is not returned from the FAX2NET server, the fax cuts off
the line and enters the redial wait state. (Handled as the destination no-reply state.)
When the TC time lapsed (T0 timeout set value) after DTMF tone “B” was received, if the T.30
protocol does not begin from the FAX2NET server, the fax cuts off the line and enters the
redial wait state. (Handled as T0 timeout.)
When communication terminates abnormally for other reason until the fax enters the T.30
protocol from a response (line pull-out, stop by STOP key, or document pull-out, etc.), the
communication is handled like normal one.
After the fax enters the T.30 protocol, if an alarm occurs, the fax performs the same alarm
operation as for the normal G3 communication.
40672201TX Rev.4
B-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.1.2 E-mail Address
When a one-touch key in which an E-mail address is registered is used as a destination, a call
is issued to a FAX2NET server telephone number.
If a FAX2NET server telephone number, account number is registered, an E-mail address is
not accepted as a destination.
While the fax is in the redial wait or delayed TX wait state, the FAX2NET server registration
cannot be deleted. (“ILLEAL OPERATION”)
Alarm processing is the same as for international telephone number.
The result of communication with the FAX2NET server is described in the Activity report.
Whether a target mail arrives at the last destination cannot be recognized from the FX051.
The user must therefore confirm the communication result on a FAX2NET Web page.
The head of an E-mail address can be defined up to 20 digits as a destination in the sender
ID column. In the same way, the head of an E-mail address can be defined up to 20 digits as
a destination to the Activity report.
4.2 Broadcasting
4.2.1 Destination Specification
As a broadcasting destination, a general destination number can be mixed together with a
telephone number or E-mail address including an international telephone prefix. Broadcasting
can be specified only with international call or E-mail address.
The method of specifying an E-mail address as a broadcasting destination is the same as of
the normal method using the O.T. key.
When information about the FAX2NET server is not registered, no E-mail address can be
specified as a broadcasting destination. The broadcasting destination cannot include a one-
touch key in which Web URL is registered.
4.2.2 Sending Operation
For broadcasting, a call is issued to destinations one by one.
Even if a broadcasting destination includes multiple international telephone numbers and E-
mail addresses, a call is issued to FAX2NET server destinations one by one. In this case,
multiple destinations cannot be reported to the FAX2NET server.
The communication with the FAX2NET server for each destination is the same as of a single-
destination sending.
The FX051 assumes that the sending to the destination is completed after the sending to the
FAX2NET server ends. At printing of a broadcasting end report, therefore, data may not
arrive at the remote facsimile.
40672201TX Rev.4
B-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.3
4.3.1 Requests
Web printing begins by selecting a one-touch key in which Web URL is registered as a
Web Printing
destination. If information about a Web address or FAX2NET server is not registered, Web
retrieval is invalid.
To prepare for Web printing, first convert a character string registered as a Web address
according to the conversion table shown in Section 5.4.
When a Web printing request is issued, it is only described in the Activity report without
facsimile communication.
For details on the Web address report to the FAX2NET server, see the chapter 7.
4.3.1.1Alarms
When the FAX2NET server returns no reply or is busy, redial is handled as normal redial.
After the FAX2NET server replies, a communication error due to TA or TB timeout is handled
like the single destination sending.
If DTMF tone “D” is returned instead of DTMF tone “B” after a Web address is reported, the
system performs the same operation as of the detection of the DTMF tone “D” for single-
destination sending.
4.3.2 Reception
When fetching a requested home page, the FAX2NET server facsimile-sends its data to the
request source. This is performed in normal G3 communication mode.
The maximum time from a Web printing request to an incoming call from the FAX2NET server
is not defined. If the FAX2NET server fails the fetch of a requested Web page, it is not
reported to the request source facsimile.
4.4
Payment Card Registration
If the Payment Card PRG. is selected from User Programming, the screen changes to the
Card Number input screen.
Enter the Card Number only with digits (max 16 digits). (However, the number can be entered
up to 20 digits.)
A call is issued to the FAX2NET server after the Card Number is entered, and Account ID,
"#8930", Card Number and Check sum are sent to the FAX2NET server using DTMF tone.
The fax shifts to the T-30 protocol after receiving the tone "B" from the FAX2NET server, and
since the registered result report is sent from the FAX2NET server, the fax message is
received by means of the same methods as polling reception. but the Card Number is not
preserved.
The Payment Card Number is entered in the Activity Report but Message Confirmation Report
is not entered.
If DTMF tone "D" is returned from the EAX2NET server, the fax displays an alarm message.
When the FAX2NET server returns no replay and in case of the interruption of power supply,
the fax does not redial.
40672201TX Rev.4
B-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.5
4.6
4.7
Non FAX2NET Dialing
In case the user does not desire the facsimile transmission via the FAX2NET server, the user
can cancel dialing to the FAX2NET server by specifying "+" prior to dialing of the international
telephone prefix.
Confidential and Relay Sending
The FAX2NET function is not used for confidential and relay sending. A call is issued to a
general line according to a specified number. An E-mail address cannot be specified for a
sending destination.
PBX Setting
(1) When PBX setting is ON and DIAL PREFIX is not set, no call is issued to the FAX2NET
server. To use the FAX2NET function at PBX=ON, DIAL PREFIX must be set.
(2) When PBX setting is ON and Flash or Earth is set, if the head is a hyphen, the
FAX2NET function is valid regardless of whether DIAL PREFIX is set. (The data suc-
ceeding the hyphen is compared with the international telephone prefix.)
4.8
4.9
Polling Reception
At polling reception, no call is issued to the FAX2NET server.
Other Restrictions
The following restrictions are provided for the FAX2NET function:
(1) PC FAX mode
At sending in PC FAX mode, the FAX2NET function is invalid. Before calling, whether
there is an international telephone prefix is not checked.
(2) Destination search function
An E-mail address is not retrieved to search for a destination using the search key.
40672201TX Rev.4
B-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(3) Telephone number registration application on PC
The application or driver group for MFP function is not changed from FX051; therefore,
the following item is limited:
The telephone number registration application on PC cannot register an E-mail address
in a one-touch key or change the contents for each one-touch key. The column of a
one-touch key in which an E-mail address is registered is not registered from the tele-
phone number application on PC.
When an attempt is made to register a new telephone number in a one-touch key in
which an E-mail address is already registered on the telephone number application, the
telephone number is newly registered, and the E-mail address remains internally.
(4) RMCS
The user cannot reference, enter, or change the FAX2NET server registration function
using RMCS.
The user cannot also register an E-mail address in a one-touch key or change the
contents of the one-touch key using RMCS. The column of the one-touch key in which
an E-mail address is registered is not registered on the RMCS screen.
When an attempt is made to register a new telephone number in a one-touch key in
which an E-mail address is already registered on RMCS, the telephone number is newly
registered, and the E-mail address remains internally.
40672201TX Rev.4
B-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.
Procedure
This section explains a protocol required to report a sending destination or requested Web
page address from the FX051 to the FAX2NET server.
5.1
Telephone Number
The figure below shows a procedure when the sending destination is a telephone number.
FAX2NET server
FX051
FAX2NET server
DIAL
TA
Digit ‘A’
Account number +‘*’
Destination FAX number +‘*’
Checksum +‘*’
TB
TC
Digit ‘B’
CED/NSF/CSI/DIS
T.30 protocol
- TA < 10 sec.; TB < 6 sec. TC < T0 timer set value. At TA or TB timeout, the service code is
14D0.
- The length of each DTMF tone is 300 ± 25ms. The time between digits is 100ms min. and 5
sec. max.
- The Account number, destination facsimile number, and check sum are delimited by DTMF
tone “*.”
- For details on check sum, see Section 5.5.
- When the FAX2NET server issues digit “D” instead of digit “B,” the request is rejected. In
this case, disconnect the line smoothly.
- After digit “B,” CNG need not be issued from the facsimile.
40672201TX Rev.4
B-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.2
E-mail Address
The figure below shows a procedure when the sending destination is an E-mail address.
FAX2NET server
FX051
DIAL
FAX2NET server
TA
Digit ‘A’
Account number +‘*’
Digit ‘#8901’ +‘*’
Destination E-mail address +‘*’
Checksum +‘*’
TB
TC
Digit ‘B’
CED/NSF/CSI/DIS
T.30 protocol
- TA < 10 sec.; TB < 6 sec. TC < T0 timer set value. At TA or TB timeout, the service code is
14D0.
- The length of each DTMF tone is 300 ± 25ms. The time between digits is 100ms min. and 5
sec. max.
- The Account number, destination facsimile number, and check sum are delimited by DTMF
tone “*.”
- The system adds DTMF tone “#8901” before the E-mail address and assumes that a DTMF
tone group succeeding “#8901” is obtained by converting an E-mail address
- For details on check sum, see Section 5.5.
- When the FAX2NET server issues digit “D” instead of digit “B,” the request is rejected. In
this case, disconnect the line smoothly.
- After digit “B,” CNG need not be issued from the facsimile.
40672201TX Rev.4
B-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.3
Web Address
The figure below shows a procedure for requesting a Web page.
FAX2NET server
FX051
DIAL
FAX2NET server
TA
Digit ‘A’
Account number +‘*’
Digit ‘#8910’ +‘*’
Destination Web URL +‘*’
Checksum +‘*’
TB
Digit ‘B’
Disconnect the line
- TA < 10 sec.; TB < 6 sec. set value. At TA or TB timeout, the service code is 14D0.
- The length of each DTMF tone is 300 ± 25ms. The time between digits is 100ms min. and 5
sec. max.
- The Account number, Web URL, and check sum are delimited by DTMF tone “*.”
- The system adds DTMF tone “#8901” before the Web address and assumes that a DTMF
tone group succeeding “#8901” is obtained by converting a Web address
- For details on check sum, see Section 5.5.
- When the FAX2NET server issues digit “D” instead of digit “B,” the request is rejected. In
this case, disconnect the line smoothly.
40672201TX Rev.4
B-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.4
Payment Card Registration
The figure below shows a procedure for Payment Card Registration.
FX051
DIAL
FAX2NET server
TA
Digit ‘A’
Account number +‘*’
Digit ‘#8930’ +‘*’
Payment Card Number +‘*’
Checksum +‘*’
TB
TC
Digit ‘B’
CED/NSF/CSI/DIS
T.30 protocol
Report transmission from the server
- TA < 10sec. TB < 6sec. set value. At TA or TB timeout, the server code is 14D0.
- The length of each DTMF tone is 300 ± 25ms. The time between digits is 100ms min. and
5sec. max.
- The Account Number, Card Number, and Check sum are delimited by DTMF tone "*".
- The fax adds DTMF tone "#8930" before the Web address and assumes that DTMF tone
group succeeding "#8930" is obtained a Card Number.
- For the detail on Check sum, see Section 5.5.
- When the FAX2NET server issues digit "D" instead of digit "B", the request is rejected, in
this case, disconnect the line smoothly.
40672201TX Rev.4
B-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.5
Character Conversion Table
To report each E-mail address and Web address with a DTMF tone, digits, uppercase letters,
lowercase letters, and symbols composing an address must be converted to a character
string that can be expressed with DTMF tones. Each character must be expressed with a
combination of two or three DTMF tones.
The character conversion table is as follows.
Table 1 DTMF tone conversion table for E-mail and Web addresses
00
10
*
20
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
30
>
40
H
I
50
R
S
T
60
\
70
f
80
p
q
r
90
z
Space
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
!
”
+
,
?
]
g
h
i
{
@
A
J
^
_
‘
#
$
%
&
’
-
K
L
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
s
}
.
B
j
t
~
/
C
D
E
M
N
O
P
Q
a
b
c
d
e
k
l
u
v
0
1
2
3
;
m
n
o
w
x
(
<
=
F
,
)
G
[
y
C10
C20
C30
Ò
C40
Ü
C50
C60
C70
ú
C80
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
È
É
Ê
Ë
Ì
Ó
ñ
ò
ó
ô
õ
ö
û
À
Á
Â
Ã
Ä
Å
Ô
è
é
ê
ë
ì
ü
Õ
Ö
à
á
â
ã
ä
å
Í
ÿ
Î
Ï
Ù
Ú
Û
í
î
Ñ
ï
ù
EURO
* The hatched letters cannot be entered under the FX051.
* ß, Æ, Ø, æ, å and ø cannot be entered because they are omitted in this conversion table.
40672201TX Rev.4
B-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.6
Check Sum
The check sum is obtained by converting the transmitted DTMF tone string (Account No. +
Control data field) values to character string according to ASCII code table 1 and adding
them.
In this case, the asterisk "*" between the account number and control data field is excluded.
Example:
“12345” + ‘*’ + “#8912” + “C236789” + ‘*’ + Check sum + ‘*’
Check sum calculation is as follows:
49 (for 1) + 50 (for 2) + 51 (for 3) + 52 (for 4) + 53 (for 5) +
35 (for #) + 56 (for 8) + 57 (for 9) + 49 (for 1) + 50 (for 2) +
67 (for C) + 50 (for 2) + 51 (for 3) + 54 (for 6) + 55 (for 7) + 56 (for 8) + 57 (for 9)
= 943
“0943” is transmitted as the check sum.
40672201TX Rev.4
B-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.
Operation
6.1
Function Selection Transition (1/2)
TECH. PROGRAMMING
1
LOCAL TEST
STANDBY MODE
1: SELF DIAGNOSIS
POWER ON
COPY
2: SENSOR CALIBRATION
3: LED TEST
FUNCTION
4: TONE SEND TEST
5: MODEM SEND TEST
6: MODEM REC. TEST
7: MF (TONE) SEND TEST
8: TONE (TEL/FAX) TEST
SELECT FUNCTION
COPY X 2
OT1
OT2
DELAYED TX
2
PRINT OPERATION
TECH. FUNCTION
01: SERVICE BIT
PRINT MEMORY MSG.
02: MONITOR CONT.
03: COUNTRY CODE
04: TIME/DATE PRINT
05: TSI PRINT
PRINT PERSONAL BOX
PRINT WEB PAGE
OT3
OT4
OT5
OT6
06: TAD MODE
CONFIDENTIAL TX
07: REAL TIME DIAL
08: TEL/FAX SWITCH
09: MDY/DMY
10: LONG DOC.SCAN
11: TONE FOR ECHO
12: MH ONLY
13: H/MODEM RATE
14: T1 (TX) TIMER VALUE
15: T1 (RX) TIMER VALUE
16: T2 TIMER *100MS
17: DIS BIT32
18: ERR.CRITERION
19: OFF HOOK BYPASS
20: NL EQUALIZER
21: ATTENUATOR
RELAY INITIATE - TX
POLLING TX/RX
REPORT PRINT
1: ACTIVITY REPORT
2: BROADCAST MCF.
3: ACTIVE MEM. FILES
4: PHONE DIRECTORY
5: CONFIGURATION
6: PROTOCOL DUMP
LOG. REPORT (SERVICE BIT = ON)
OT7
22: T/F TONE ATT.
23: MF ATT.
COUNTER DISP (CLEAR)
24: RING DURA. *10MS
25: CML TIMING *100MS
26: LED HEAD STROBE
27: LED HEAD WIDTH
28: MEDIA TYPE
DRUM COUNTER
TONER COUNTER
DRUM (T) COUNTER
PRINT COUNTER
SCAN COUNTER
29: TR LATCH CURRENT
30: NSF SWITCH
31: ID/TSI PRIORITY
32: TONER COUNT CLEAR
33: PARALLEL PICK UP
OT8
LOCATION PROGRAM
OT
ONE TOUCH KEY PRG.
AUTO DIAL KEY PRG.
A/D
3
SYSTEM RESET
#
1: ALL DATA CLR
2: LOCATION DATA CLR
3: CONFIG. DATA CLR
GROUP SETTING
4
5
DEFAULT TYPE SET
OT : One touch key
A/D : Auto dial
PC-LOADING
40672201TX Rev.4
B-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Function Selection Transition (2/2)
FUNCTION
OT9
USER PROGRAMMING
1
FUNC. PROGRAMMING
01: MCF (SINGLE-LOC.)
02: MCF (MULTI-LOC.)
03: ERR.REPORT (MCF.)
04: IMAGE IN MCF.
05: SENDER ID
06: MONITOR VOLUME
07: BUZZER VOLUME
08: CLOSED NETWORK
09: TX MODE DEFAULT
10: T/F TIMER PRG.
11: RING RESPONSE
12: DISTINCTIVE RING
13: 1'ST PAPER SIZE
14: USER LANGUAGE
15: INCOMING RING
16: REMOTE RECEIVE
17: MEM./FEEDER SW
18: POWER SAVE MODE
19: ECM FUNCTION
20: REMOTE DIAGNOSIS
21: PC/FAX SWITCH
22: NO TONER MEM RX
23: MEM FULL SAVE
24: CONTINUOUS TONE
25: INSTANT DIALING
26: RESTRICT ACCESS
27: WIDTH REDUCTION
28: ONE TOUCH PARAM.
2
DIAL PARAMETER
REDIAL TRIES
REDIAL INTERVAL
DIAL TONE DETECT
BUSY TONE DETECT
MF (TONE)/DP (PULSE)
PULSE DIAL RATE
PULSE MAKE RATIO
PULSE DIAL TYPE
MF (TONE) DURATION
PBX LINE
FLASH/EARTH/NORMAL
AUTO START
DIAL PREFIX
3
4
CLOCK ADJUSTMENT
SYSTEM DATA PRG.
TSI/CSI
SENDER ID
CALL BACK NO.
5
6
7
8
PERSONAL BOX PRG.
MEM. PASSWORD PRG.
FAX NETWORK PRG.
FAX2NET SERVICE
*1) U.F No.26: Changeable at
RESTRICT ACCESS = ON.
(Default = OFF)
1: WEB RETRIEVAL
2: PAYMENT CARD REG.
9
RESTRICT ID PRG.*1
OT10
PRINTER CLEANING
40672201TX Rev.4
B-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.2
One-Touch Dial Registration Transition
SELECT FUNCTION (OT)
MEMORY AVAIL.=100%
OT8
LOCATION PROGRAMMING
ENTER (SRCH,O,A/D,#)
OT key
Destination selection during delayed TX
ILLEGAL OPERATION
3 sec. lapsed.
When a Web address is already
registered:
When no account No.
is registered:
When an E-mail address is
already registered:
ONE TOUCH KEY PRG.
[FAX]YES( ) NO( )
key
key
See Section 6.2.1, “Telephone
Number Registration Transition.”
ONE TOUCH KEY PRG.
[EMAL]YES( ) NO( )
key
key
See Section 6.2.2, “E Mail Address
Registration Transition.”
ONE TOUCH KEY PRG.
[WEB]YES( ) NO( )
key
key
See Section 6.2.3, 2 “Web Address
Registration Transition.”
40672201TX Rev.4
B-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.2.1 Telephone Number Registration Transition
SELECT FUNCTION (OT)
MEMORY AVAIL.=100%
OT8
LOCATION PROGRAMMING
ENTER(SRCH,OT,A/D.#)
OT key
Destination selection during
delayed TX
Account No. not registered.
ONE TOUCH KEY PRG.
[FAX]YES( ) NO( )
key
Registered.
ILLEGAL OPERATION
3 sec. lapsed.
START key
NO=<FAX NO.>
ID=<LOCATION ID.>
NO=03 3404 7123
ID=NEWYORK OFFICE
START key
02……890
NO=_
ID=
NO=0273 56 7890_
ID=NEWYORK OFFICE
0……123
START key
NO=03 3404 7123_
ID=
NO=0273 56 7890
ID=NEWYORK OFFICE
NO=03 3404 7123
ID=NEWYORK OFFICE
START key
START key
666
NO=03 3404 7123
ID=_
NO=0273 56 7890
ID=OEWYORK OFFICE
………
666
NO=03 3404 7123
ID=N
NO=0273 56 7890
ID=OKI TAKASAKI
3
START key
NO=03 3404 7345
02…456
NO=0273 12 3456_
START key
NO=03 3404 7123
ID=N3
START key
………
NO=03 3404 7123
ID=NEWYORK OFFICE
START key
NO=<OR LOCATION>
3 sec. lapsed.
NO=_
0……345
NO=03 3404 7345_
START key
Note 1) If a telephone number is doubly registered in a
one-touch key in which an E-mail or Web
address is already registered, the e mail or
Web address is deleted.
40672201TX Rev.4
B-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.2.2 E-mail Address Registration Transition
SELECT FUNCTION (OT)
MEMORY AVAIL.=100%
OT8
LOCATION PROGRAMMING
ENTER(SRCH,OT,A/D.#)
OT key
ONE TOUCH KEY PRG.
[FAX]YES( ) NO( )
key
Destination selection during
delayed TX
E-mail registered*1
ILLEGAL OPERATION
3 sec. lapsed.
CAPS OFF
CAPS OFF
EMAIL:
_
EMAIL:
START key
okitaro@okidata.co.j
6
666……77
CAPS OFF
EMAIL:
6
CAPS OFF
okihanako@oki.co.jp_
EMAIL:
666……2
START key
CAPS OFF
EMAIL:
okitaro@okidata_
0……77
CAPS OFF
EMAIL:
taro@okidata.co.jp_
START key
*1) CAPS MODE must be set to OFF at start of registration.
Note 1) If an E-mail is doubly registered in a one-touch key in which a telephone number or Web address is already registered, the
telephone number or Web address is deleted.
40672201TX Rev.4
B-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.2.3 Web Address Registration Transition
SELECT FUNCTION (OT)
MEMORY AVAIL.=100%
OT8
LOCATION PROGRAMMING
ENTER(SRCH,OT,A/D.#)
OT key
Destination selection during
delayed TX
ONE TOUCH KEY PRG.
[WEB]YES( ) NO( )
key
ILLEGAL OPERATION
3 sec. lapsed.
Web address registered
*1
*2
*1
CAPS OFF
CAPS OFF
http://www.fax2net
WEB:
http://_
WEB:
START key
99……88
99……66
CAPS OFF
CAPS OFF
EMAIL:
WEB:
http://WWW.fax2net_
p://www.fax2net.com_
START key
START key
*1) CAPS MODE must be set to OFF at start of registration.
*2) “http://” cannot be edited. Up to 64 characters can be registered, excluding those characters.
Note 1) If a Web address is doubly registered in a one-touch key in which a telephone number or E-mail address is
already registered, the telephone number or E-mail address is deleted.
Note 2) A one-touch key in which only a web address is registered cannot be registered as a group.
Note 3) When a Web address is registered in a one-touch key registered as a group, the one-touch key is deleted from
the group destination.
40672201TX Rev.4
B-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.3.
Destination Registration Space Display/Registration Transition
6.3.1 One-Touch/Abbreviated Dial Registration Transition
SELECT FUNCTION (OT)
MEMORY ABAIL.=100%
When any abbreviated dial is free:
*2
OT8
AUTO DIAL NO.[01]
YES( ) NO( /SRCH)
*1
LOCATION PROGRAMMING
ENTER(SRCH,OT,A/D.#)
When all one-touch keys and abbreviated dials are registered:
SEARCH key
*2
- Press the SEARCH key to display free one-touch
keys and abbreviated dials in order.
- A one-touch key in which an E-mail or Web
address is registered is not displayed.
ONE TOUCH NO.[01]
YES( ) NO( /SRCH)
3 sec. lapsed or
key
STOP or
key
When an abbreviated
dial number or
account number is
not registered:
ONE TOUCH NO.[01]
[FAX]YES( ) NO( )
NO LOCATION
AVAILABLE
FAX E-MAIL WEB
key
key
3 sec. lapsed
NO=<FAX NO.>
ID=<LOCATION ID.>
3 sec. lapsed
NO=_
ID=
NO=<OR LOCATION>
3 sec. lapsed
03……123
NO=_
NO=03 3404 7123_
ID=
03……345
NO=03 3404 7345_
START key
START key
NO=03 3404 7123
ID=_
6663
NO=03 3404 7123
ID=N3
3……
NO=03 3404 7123
ID=NEWYORK OFFICE
START key
To write to flash, press the STOP or FUNCTION key on the screen shown by *1, or wait until 59-sec. timeout occurs.
40672201TX Rev.4
B-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.3.2 Ten Key Stack Calling Transition
SELECT FUNCTION (OT)
MEMORY ABAIL.=100%
1234
*1
The COPY key is invalid at dual access.
START key
1234_
COPY key
- Press the SEARCH key to display free one-touch
*2
Calling or memory reading
ONE TOUCH NO.[01]
YES( ) NO( /SRCH)
keys and abbreviated dials in order.
- A one-touch key in which an e mail or Web
address is registered is not displayed.
3 sec. lapsed or
key
STOP or
key
When all one-touch keys
and abbreviated
dials are registered:
The entry number shown in *1 is displayed.
NO LOCATION
AVAILABLE
NO=1234
ID=_
59 second T.O
Standby
3 sec. lapsed
666……
NO=1234
ID=NEW YORK OFFICE
STOP key
or F key
Pre-feed
prohibited
START key
*2 When an abbreviated dial is free:
NO=<OR LOCATION>
AUTO DIAL NO.[01]
YES( ) NO( /SRCH)
3 sec. lapsed
NO=_
AUTO START=ON
AUTO START=OFF
03……
NEW YORK OFFICE
YES(STRT) NO(LOC.)
NO=03 3404 7345
START key
START key
*3
NEW YORK OFFICE
DIALING
PROGRAMMING
Writing to flas
1 sec. + Writing completion
*1) For function communication, the COPY key is invalid. (delayed transmission, broadcasting, confidential,
relay, polling reception, etc.)
When the number of entered digits exceeds 32, the COPY key is invalid.
40672201TX Rev.4
B-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.4
CAPS Key Function
The CAPS key assigns OT7.
E-mail address registration example
Caps ON Mode
Caps OFF Mode
CAPS OFF
CAPS ON
CAPS key
CAPS key
Ten key
Ten key
CAPS OFF
CAPS ON
EMAIL:
OKI_
EMAIL:
EMAIL:
OKIdata_
OKI_
Caps OFF Mode
Caps ON Mode
CAPS OFF
CAPS ON
EMAIL:
EMAIL:
EMAIL:
OKIdata_
OKIdata_
OKIdataSYSTEM_
At entry of an E-mail address or Web address, the uppercase
CAPS can be switched to OFF during CAPS = ON.
lowercase letter entry switching is enabled.
40672201TX Rev.4
B-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.5.
User Setting Transition
SELECT FUNCTION (OT)
MEMORY AVAIL.=100%
OT9
1:FUNC. PROGRAMMING
YES( ) NO( /1-9)
1
7
key
1-9
7
7:FAX NETWORK PRG.
YES( ) NO( /1-9)
1-9
1-9
key
key
8:FAX2NET SERVICE
YES( ) NO( /1-9)
8
9
See Section 6.5.1, “Facsimile
Network Setting Transition.”
key
key
9:RESTRICT ID PRG.
YES( ) NO( /1-9)
See Section 6.6, “FAX2NET
SERVICE operation.”
key
1-9
User setting 26: RESTRICT ACCESS = ON
SELECT FUNCTION (OT)
MEMORY AVAIL.=100%
OT9
1:FUNC. PROGRAMMING
YES( ) NO( /1-8)
1
7
8
key
1-8
1-8
1-8
7
7:FAX NETWORK PRG.
YES( ) NO( /1-8)
key
key
8:FAX2NET SERVICE
YES( ) NO( /1-8)
See Section 6.5.1, “Facsimile
Network Setting Transition.”
See Section 6.6, “FAX2NET
SERVICE operation.”
User setting 26: RESTRICT ACCESS = OFF
40672201TX Rev.4
B-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.5.1 Facsimile Network Setting Transition
7:FAX NETWORK PRG.
YES( ) NO( /1-8)
key
When E-mail or Web communication is reserved:
Server telephone No. registered.
SERVER TEL NO.
Server telephone No. not registered.
SERVER TEL NO.
NO=_
ILLEGAL OPERATION
NO=03 5341 7700
3 sec. lapsed.
03……
03……
*1)
SERVER TEL NO.
NO=03 5341 7700_
Account No. registered.
Account No. not registered.
ACCOUNT NO.
NO=_
ACCOUNT NO.
NO=2160006612
When the server’s telephone
number is deleted:
216……
216
ACCOUNT NO.
NO=2160006612_
*2)
International telephone number registered.
INTERNATIONAL PREFIX
NO=0041
International telephone number not registered.
INTERNATIONAL PREFIX
NO=_
0041
0041
INTERNATIONAL PREFIX
NO=0041_
*3)
STARTkey
*1) Press the space key to delete the character and press the START key; the account number is deleted.
*2) Press the space key to delete the character and press the START key; the server’s telephone number is deleted.
The server’s telephone number and account number are set by pressing the START key. (The server’s telephone
and account numbers must be registered.)
*3) Press the START key to suppress spaces for registration.
Note: If no server’s telephone number is registered, an account number cannot be registered.
40672201TX Rev.4
B-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.6
FAX2NET SERVICE
8:FAX2NET SERVICE
YES( ) NO( /1-8)
When no account No. is registered.
key
ILLEGAL OPERATION
3 sec. lapsed.
1:WEB RETRIEVAL
YES( ) NO( /1-2)
1
2
key
key
1-2
1-2
2:PAYMENT CARD REG.
YES( ) NO( /1-2)
See Section 6.6.1,
“Web Retrival Transition.”
key
key
See Section 6.6.2, “Payment
Card Regist Transition.”
40672201TX Rev.4
B-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.6.1 WEB Retrieval Transition
1:WEB RETRIEVAL
YES( ) NO( /1-2)
All 0T Web address not registered
key
NOT PROGRAMMED
3 sec. lapsed.
*1)
SELECT LOCATION
Web address not registered
0Tkey
www.fax2net.com
YES(START) NO(LOC.)
*2)
NOT PROGRAMMED
3 sec. lapsed.
START key
www.fax2net.com
FAX2NET
Standby
*1) One-touch keys 1 to 10 only can be selected.
*2) Web addresses are displayed from the top on
the upper row. The broadcasting is inhibited.
40672201TX Rev.4
B-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.6.2 PAYMENT CARD REGIST
2:PAYMENT CARD REG.
YES( ) NO( /1-2)
key
R system alarm
Transmission waiting
with document
Memory near end
NO.=< CARD NUMBER >
FUNC. NOT AVAILABLE
MEMORY OVERFLOW
3 sec. lapsed.
3 sec. lapsed.
3 sec. lapsed.
12345 key
NO.=_
12345 key
NO.=12345_
START key
R system alarm
0353585297
FAX2NET
*1)
Standby
*1) Server Tel No. is displayed from the top on
the upper row.
40672201TX Rev.4
B-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.7.
6.7.1 Outline of Operation
(1) Selecting OT in which an E-mail address is registered
Operation Rules
1) When OT is selected at confidential sending, relay request sending, polling reception,
or tune dial before calling, message “ILLEGAL OPERATION” is displayed, and OT
cannot be selected. At real-time calling, message “ILLEGAL OPERATION” is also
displayed, and OT cannot be selected.
2) When no account number is registered, if a single destination, broadcasting destina-
tion, or group destination is registered, OT cannot be selected.
3) When an account number is deleted, if it is already registered as a group, it is deleted
from the group destination.
4) When the START key is pressed after a selected destination is displayed, if there is
no document, message “LOAD DOCUMENT” is displayed.
(2) Selecting OT in which a Web address is registered
Apply (1), 1) and 2).
(3) An E-mail and Web addresses cannot be searched by the search function.
(4) Valid keys at registration of various information
Item
Web address
E-mail address
Server telephone No.
Account No.
International telephone No.
Payment card No.
Valid key
Max.number of digits
64
64
32
16
10
20
Ten keys 0 to 9, *, #, hyphen, OT1 to OT10
Ten keys 0 to 9, *, #, hyphen, OT1 to OT10
Ten keys 0 to 9, *, #, hyphen, OT8, OT9, OT10
Ten keys 0 to 9, OT9
Ten keys 0 to 9, OT9
Ten keys 0 to 9, OT9
(5) Character allocation to one-touch keys
OT1 : .
OT2 : _
OT3 : ~
OT4 : ”
OT5 : /
OT6 : @
OT7 : CAPS
OT8 : +
OT9 : Space
OT10: P (Pause)
40672201TX Rev.4
B-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(6) Ten key character display sequence at registration of E-mail or Web address
Ten key 1
Ten key 2
Ten key 3
Ten key 4
Ten key 5
Ten key 6
Ten key 7
Ten key 8
Ten key 9
Ten key 0
1
2 -> A -> B -> C
3 -> D -> E -> F
4 -> G -> H -> I
5 -> J -> K -> L
6 -> M -> N -> O
7 -> P -> Q -> R -> S
8 -> T -> U -> V
9 -> W -> X -> Y -> Z
0 -> 1 Symbol -> 2 Umlaut character -> Norway character->Symbol
(Note 1, Note 2, Note 3)
Ten key *
Ten key #
*
#
Note 1) 0 -> Umlaut character -> Norway character -> Symbol at NATIONAL CODE =
GER
Note 2) The Umlaut character, Norway character, and “ · ” cannot be selected at regis-
tration of an E-mail or Web address.
Note 3) Based on the symbol display sequence (. _ ” / @ \ % ! # & ’ ( ) * — : ; = ? · ).
* Symbols @, \, ”, _, ~, and % cannot be specified at registration of an ID.
(7) A server telephone number, account number, international telephone number, and E-
mail or Web address can be initialized with ALL DATA CLR, LOCATION DATA CLR, or
DEFAULT TYPE SEST.
1 Symbols (! # & ’ ( ) * + , — . / : ; = ? @ \ ” _ ~ % · )
2 Umlaut characters (ä ß ñ ö ü)
3 Norway characters (Æ Å Ø æ å ø)
40672201TX Rev.4
B-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7.
Report
7.1
Configuration Report
The following items are added unconditionally. (For details on the number of registered digits
and types for each item, see Operation.)
25:INSTANT DIALING 26:RESTRICT ACCESS
27:WIDTH REDUCTION
OFF
ON
OFF
TEL NO.
=
=
=
=
=
12345678901234567890
12345678901234567890
12345678901234567890123456789012
1234567890123456
CALL BACK NO.
RERVER TEL NO.
ACCOUNT NO.
INTERNATIONAL PREFIX
Addition of new item
}
1234567890
REDIAL TRIES
DIAL TONE DETECT
3TRY
OFF
REDIAL INTERVAL
BUSY TONE DETECT
3MIN
ON
7.2
Telephone Directory List Report
Describe an E-mail address and Web URL at a one-touch definition portion. The E-mail
address and Web URL must also be described in lowercase letters.
URL must be described with http://.
(For details on the number of registered digits and types for each item, see Operation.)
PRM ECHO RATE
(OFF) (14.4)
LOCATION ID
OR
27:WIDTH REDUCTION
OFF
ONE TOUCH
OFF
1
2
3
4
5
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNO
12345678901234567890123456789012
abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz………………@ABCDEFGHIJKL…………co.jp
s-ishika@okidata.co.jp
Describe max. 64 digits on one line.
When an E-mail address is registered:
}
http://iboodt78.taka.okidata.co.jp/odsnews
When Web URL is registered:
ODS TAKASAKI
0273242116
OR
40672201TX Rev.4
B-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7.3
7.3.1 Location ID
A character string including lowercase letters and symbols can be described in the Location
Lowercase Letter Description Support
ID column of the following reports:
- Telephone directory report (Total number of registered digits)
- Broadcasting entry report (First 20 digits)
- Broadcasting confirmation report (First 20 digits)
7.3.2 Distant Station ID
A character string (first 20 characters) including lowercase letters and symbols can be de-
scribed in the Distant Station ID column of the following reports:
- Activity report
- Power outage report
- Message confirmation report
- Active memory files
- Protocol dump
7.4
Description of Communication Mode Column
Describe information about the FAX2NET service communication in the MODE column of the
following reports:
- Activity report
- Power outage report
- Message confirmation report
- Active memory files
- Protocol dump
<Contents of MODE column>
FAX over IP (International call)................................. FNET
FAX to E-MAIL (E-mail) ............................................ FNET
Web retrieval (Web print request)............................. WEB
Broadcast including FAX over IP or FAX to E-MAIL. B.C.
Payment card registration......................................... P-CARD
7.5
Service Code Description
Add service codes 909D and 14D0 to the following reports:
- Activity report
- Power outage report
- Message confirmation report
- Protocol dump
40672201TX Rev.4
B-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8.
Service Codes
The following service codes are assigned for the FAX2NET functions:
- 909D
A telephone number to be called was composed of only a dial prefix and international tele-
phone prefix (and hyphen), and a sending destination telephone number to be transmitted to
the FAX2NET server was not found.
- 14D0
The FAX2NET server returned DTMF tone “D” that meant “no good.”
40672201TX Rev.4
B-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|
Miele Washer W 3514 WPS User Manual
Mustek Computer Monitor TP 6000 User Manual
NETGEAR Network Router MBR624GU User Manual
Nikon Digital Camera 1 V2 Black User Manual
NordicTrack Treadmill NTL10951 User Manual
Nostalgia Electrics Fondue Maker RFF 500 User Manual
Outback Power Systems Automobile Battery Charger MX60 User Manual
Palsonic Flat Panel Television TFTV1520D User Manual
Panasonic Digital Camera DMC FS7 User Manual
Panasonic Impact Driver EY6901 User Manual